3803 2_3420_MLM_Vol_4_Sep1979 2 3420 MLM Vol 4 Sep1979
User Manual: Pdf 3803-2_3420_MLM_Vol_4_Sep1979
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 162
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
('
(,-
(~"
('
('
(,
(~
(' {' (':
"".~'"
(~
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
('"
(,"
(e,
('
--- -------_
_W_
-- - --.,-
- ..=.==..==.
- =-==-=
-- - - - -- -- - - Magnetic Tape Subsystem
Maintenance Manual
==.
.
=. -
.::
_.
3803-2/3420
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
,:=
('
(
(
C.'
('
(:,
Maintenance Library
3803-2 I
3420
3803-21
3420
3803-21
3420
SIN
SIN
SIN
SIN
MLM
MLM
MLM
MLM
PLAN
START
SENSE
MAP
INTF
MAP
OPER
VOL. 1
==
-~
(
3803-21
3420
00-000
1A-00O
6A-XXX
18-000
68-XXX
--------------- --=- = -= -- ----
(:
07-000
CARR
16-000
21-XXX
08-000
40-000
58-XXX
REF
MAP
75-001
85-XXX
11-000
15-XXX
INST
90-000
INDEX
VOL. 2
VOL. 3
VOl. 4
l
(
c
SAFETY
PERSONAL
The importance of personal safety cannot be
overemphasized. To ensure personal safety and the
safety of co-workers,•• foUow e~tablished',~afety
practices and procedures at alf times: '"
CE SAFETY PRACTICES
Look for and obey the, DANGER notices found in the
maintenance documentation. All CEs must be familiar
with the general safetypracti.ces and the procedures
for artiticial respiration outlines in IBM Form 229:-1264.
For convenience, this, form is duplicated ,to the ri~ht.
MACHINE
To protect machines from damage, turn off power
before removing or inserting circuit cards of
components. 00 not leave internal machine areas
needlessly exposed, avoid shoring panel pins when
scoping, and handle machine parts sarefully, in
addition, look for and observe the CAUTION notices
found in maintenance documentation.
,
"
~\
\
/'
./
All Customer Engineers are expected to take every safety
precaution possible and observe the following safety prac·
tices while maintaining IBM equipment:
1. You should not work alone under hazardous conditions
or around equipment with dangerous voltage. Always
advise your manager if you MUST work alone.
2. Remove all power, ac and dc, when removing or _m·
bling major components, working in immediate areas of
power supplies, performing mechanical inspection of pow.
er supplies, or installing changes in machine circuitry.
3. After turning off wall box power switch, lock it in the
Off position'or tag it with a "Do Not Operate" tag, Form
229·1266. Pull power supply cord whenever possible.
4. When it is absolutely necessary to work on equipment
having exposed operating mechanical parts or exposed
live electrical circuitry anywhere in the machine, observe
the following precautions:
a. Another person familiar with power off controls must
be in immediate vicinity.
b. Do not wear rings, wrist watches, chains, bracelets, or
metal cuff links.
c. Use only insulated pliers and screwdrivers.
d. Keep one hand in pocket.
e. When using test instruments, be certain that controls
are set correctly and that insulated probes of proper
capacity are used.
f. Avoid contacting ground potential (metal floor strips,
machine frames, etc.l. Use suitable rubber mats, pur·
chased locally if necessary.
5. Wear safety glasses when:
a. Using a hammer to drive pins, riveting. staking. etc.
b. Power or hand drilling, reaming, grir:'ding, etc.
c. Using spring hooks, attaching springs.
d. Soldering, wire cutting, removing steel'bands.
e. Cleaning parts with solvents, sprays, cleaners, chemi·
cals, etc.
'
f. Performing any (ltMr work that may be hazardous to
your eyes. REMEMBER - THEY ARE YOUR EYES.
6. Follow special safety instructions when performing special·
ized tasks, such as handl,ing cathode ray tubes and extremely
high voltages. These.instructions are outlined in CEMs
and the safety portion ohhe maintenance manuals.
7. Do not use solvents, chemic,lIs, greases, or oils that have
not been approved by IBM'.
8. Avoid using tools or test equipment that have not been ap·
proved by IBM.
9. Replace worn or broken tools and test equipinent.
10. Lift by standing or pushing up with stronger leg musclesthis takes strain off back mu~les. Do not lift any equip·
ment or parts weighing ovar 60 pounds.
11. After maintenance, restore all safety devices"such as guards,
shields, signs, and grounding wires.
12. Each Customer Engineer is responsible to be certain that
no action on h is part renders products unsafe or eKposes
customer personnel to hazards.
13. Place removed machine covers in a safe out·of·the·way
place where no one can trip over them.
14. Ensure that all machine covers are in place before returning
machine to customer.
15. Always place CE tool kit away from walk areas where no
one can trip over it; for eKample, un~er desk or table.
'--
'
./
',--~
Knowing safety rules is not MOUIh.
An u ...fe act will i_itably ..... to an IIIICidMt.
Use good judgment· eI",",-, .,.... ....
-,
,.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRAtiON
General ConsiderMions
1. Start Immediately - Seconds Count
Do not move victim unless absolutely neces-y to _
from danger. Do not wait or look for help aT stop to
loosen clothing, warm the victim, or apply stimulants.
2. Check Mouth for Obstructions
Remove foreign objects .. PUII to~gue forward.
3. Loosen Clothing - Keep Victim Warm
Take care of these items after victim is b ....thing by himself or when help is available.
4. Remain in-Position
After victim revives, be ready to resume respiration if
necessary.
5. Call a Doctor
Have someone summon medical aid.
6. Don't Give Up
Continue without ,interruption until victim is breathing
without help or is certainly dead.
Rescue Breathing 'or Ad"lts
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Place victim on hi,S back immediately.
Clear throat of water, food, or foreign matter.
Tilt head back to open air passage.
Lift jaw up to keep tongue out of air passage.
Pinch nostrils to prevent ai~ leakage when you blow.
Blow until you see chest rise.
Remove your lips and allow lungs to empty.
Listen for snoring and gurglings - signs of throat obstruction.
9. Repeat mouth to mouth breathing 10-20 times a minute.
Continue rescue breathing until victim breathes for himself.
"~
Thumb and
finger positions
Final mouth-tomouth position
,
~"
'.
\
16. Avoid touching moving mec:tlanical petti when lubricating,
checking for play, etc.
17. When using stroboscope,lio not touch ANYTHING - it
may be moving.
18. Avoid wearing loose dothing that may be C8Ufht in mao
chinery. Shirt sleeves must be lett buttoMd or roiWd abow
the elbow.
19. Ties must be tucked in shirt or have a tie c:IaIp tpn",IbIV
nonconductivel approximately 3 indies from end. Tie
chains are not recommended.
20. Before starting equipment, make certain fellow CEs and
customer personnel are not in a 'hazardous position.
21. Maintain good housekeeping in _a of machine while per.
forming and after completing maintenance.
'"
/
~I
"
(,'
C t
C' C.' (: C: C (
..
C: C
('~
C
(
c
(: (' {
./
(
'<,
(~
(:'
(~
/
(~
C
(~
(~
(0
VOLUME 4 CONTENTS BY SECTION
For subject details or subjects not found in this table of contents, refer to
the general INDEX section in this volume.
SECTION 40
Subsystem Concepts . . . . .
Subsystem Recording Methods
3803-2 Controls .
3803-2 Features .
Tape Commands
40-001
40-002
40-003
40-004
40-005
SECTION 50
Channel Buffer Circuits
Write Circuits . . .
Read Circuits . . .
MP1/MP2 Circuits
ROS Circuits
6250 bpi . . . . .
50-000
50-001
50-002
50-003
50-010
50-020
SECTION 52
Microprocessor Clocks
MP1 Instruction Counter.
Local Storage Register .
XOUTA/XOUTB Registers . .
High/Low Order ROS Registers
o and Special MP1/2 Registers
Channel Tag In/Bus In Registers
TUBO Registers. . . . . .
Microprocessor Information
Microprocessor Instructions
52-005
52':'010
52-015
52-025
52-030
52-035
52-040
52-045
52-060
52-065
SECTION 53
Oscillator . . . . . . . . . .
Read/Write Counters/Clocks.
Data Flow Clock
Write Clock/Counter
Write Group Buffer .
Channel Buffer Controls
CRIC/CROC . . . . .
Write Service Controls. . . .
Miscellaneous 'Write Registers
Read Sequencing' and A/ B Registers
CRC Generators. . .
Write Triggers . . .
Read Track Register .
RIC/ROC . . . . . .
Skew Detection . . .
Group Buffer Counter
Read Cycle Controls .
SECTION 54
Interface . . . . . .
Command Typing . .
Setection and Priority
SECTION 55
LWR (Loop Write Read) . . . . .
Basic Recording Technique
Common Microprogram Routines .
55-005
55-007
55-020
SECTION 57
NRZI . . . . . . .
Translate . . . . .
Write Data Convert
Read Data Convert
57-006
57-020
57-025
57-026
SECTION 58
S/360, S/370 Switching
Two Channel Switch
Tie Breaker . . . . . .
Device Switching . . .
Inbound Crosspoint Switching
58-005
58-010
58-030
58-050
58-101
SECTION 75
CE Panel Information
..
75-001
SECTION 80
Tools and Test Equipment
80-000
SECTION 85
PM Procedures and Schedules
85-000
SECTION 90
Installation . . . . '. . . . .
90-000
INDEX
Detailed Index (Volumes 1 through 4)
('
,.-"
(.
°
0•
(
,.
i~.·
c. \
~
. INPEX 1
53-005
53-010
53-015
53-020
53-025
53-030
53-035
53-040
53-045
53-055
53-065
53-070
53-075
53-080
53-085
53-090
53-095
54-000
54-00,.
54-005
3103-2/3420
40-000
© Copyright Intemlllionel Bueil1tl8S Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
..
---~----
--~
40-001
OPER-SUBSYSTEM CONCEPTS
BASIC SUBSYSTEM
READ BACK CHECKING
The IBM 3803-2/3420 Magnetic Tape Subsystem
consists of an IBM 3803 Model 2 Tape Control and one
or more IBM 3420 Magnetic Tape Units. The 3420 tape
units are available in six models with tape speeds of
75, 125, and 200 inches per second (ips)
(190,5/317,5/508 cm/sec) for Models 3 and 4, 5 and 6,
and 7 and 8, respectively.
A two-gap read/write head with 0.150 inch (3,81 mm)
between read and write gaps allows read back
checking during a write operation. Moving forward,
tape passes first the write gap, then the read gap.
The 3803 Model 2 operates in 6250 bpi and 1600 bpi
modes.
A 3803 tape control without any switching features
controls up to eight 3420 tape units (1 x8 configuration,
also called selection logic).
'
The 3803 command set, status responses, and basic
sense data are compatible with those used by IBM
24oo-series tape subsystems. However, there are some
minor programming differences. For example:
1.
The number ()f sense bytes and contents of those
bytes differ from those used by 2400-series
subsystems.
2.
All commands not shown on 40-005 and 40-008
set COMMAND REJECT in the sense information
which, in turn, sets Unit Check in the status byte,
indicating to the system' that something is wrong.,
3.
A sense' command must be issued after an error
condition sets Unit Check in the unit status byte.
In most instances, non-tim~ dependent programs that
operate successfully on' an IBM 2400-series tape
subsystem will operate correctly on an I,BM
3803-2/3420 subsystem.
3420 TAPE UNIT
Information presented in this section applies to all
models of the tape unit.
Channel
I TSWI~t'Ch(aFneaetlure) i~!;~l_~,;~~~:;_ _'
I
t~
50 003
I
58-010
L-----~r::I.
r - -
D,(vFieCaetSuWrei)"h
50 003
~M:"~':OC: I;'~:: ---
~~l~~~l~~1~;~;~~~j;~~ml;;m;~~~~;~~;1;;iIl;lfu1;i;;1jj~~1mjjj~~~*jljl1~;ll~jmm;~~mmjjjl;1;l;1;mjmjl;*j~~j~~~lil;~~l;ljlj;jmj~ljlj~@~jfr~jjfftr,
.
:.i~'
'::.i:.
...
::.i.:!.:
...
::.!:..: .·;.: .:
.--
Subsystem Lim its
!.I.!.!.'.!.!.!.:.'
58-060
75-001
I::!.;.::!'
..::I...
~= ~:~ ~: :
FULL-WIDTH ERASURE
~
Tape Unit
co'"' . " ,
";.
• • •
••
".-,"
3803/3420 Subsystein Schematic
AUTOMATIC THREADING
TAPE TRANSPORT
A write reel latch secures the file reel to the reel hub
automatically. When the operator places a file reel or
cartridge on the reel hub and presses LOAD/REWII')ID,
the power window closes, the write reel latch secures
the file reel to the hub, and tape is automatically
threaded, loaded into the vacuum columns, and
positioned at load point without further operator action.
A single direct-drive capstan moves tape forward or
backward. Air bearings reduce friction and tape wear
since the oxide (recording) surface of the tape contacts
only the read/write head and the tape cleaner. Short,
tapered vacuum columns greatly reduce tape inertia
when starting and stopping tape. The tapered columns
and single, direct-drive capstan start and stop tape
quickly and smoothly.
IBM Easy load cartridge
When used with a solid-flange tape reel (standard leM
10.5 inch). the optional, IBM Easy Load Cartridge
reduces tape handling and helps prevent tape
contamination or physical damage.
During a load operation, if the first threading sequence
is unsuccessful, tape is rewound into the cartridge and
another attempt is made.
With compatible, features, 3420 Models 3, 5, and 7 can
be attached to the 3803-2 without modification.
:.l;I ,!~:.[ li·:.
:.:::::.::::.::::.:
......:.::.:
. :::
.. :::
.. :::.::.:
.
. ::::.':.:.:.'.::'::::":.::':::.:.'.:.:.'.:.:.'.::::'::::':::'::::'::':.::':::.'::::':::.":.::.":.:::.'.::::'::.:."::"'::.::'::'::::.'::::.'::::
.
..
':.::.:.'.:::'::::':::::'::::'::.::'::.::'::::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::'::::.'::::.":. -::.::'::"':.:::':'-::"':.::.".::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.::'::.'::::.::'::.::'::.'::::.'::::.:."::.::'::.::'::.::'::.'::::.::'::.'::::.'::::
..
':.::.:':::.::.::.::.::.::::.:.:::.:.:::.::":.::::.::.::::.::.::::.::
...
:.:::
.....
:::.:::::.:::.::.::.::
.•
REWINDING
Tape remains in the vacuum columns during rewind
operations. Rewind ends when a photocell senses a
) reflective marker on
beginning-of-tape (load point) reflective marker on
tape.
During a rewind unload operation, tape is rewound
completely onto the file reel. The tape unit is left in
unloaded status, with the tape reel latch unlocked and
the window open, allowing the operator to remove the
file reel.
An erase head applies 'a strong magnetic field that
erases the entire width of tape during write operations.
Full-width erasure prevents interchangeability problems
when tape is written on one tape unit and read on
another; it also reduces the chances of leaving
extraneous bits in interblock gaps or skip areas.
During a write, write tape mark, or erase operation, the
tape unit monitors the erase head operation. On a 3420
Model 4, 6, or 8, an erase head failure drops tape unit
ready status and halts tape motion. On a 3420 Model
3, 5, or 7, an erase head failure sets Unit Check, but
does not drop ready status.
FILE PROTECTION
A write enable ring must be present in the file reel
When writing. To avoid destroying information on tape,
the write enable ring is removed. A reel without the
ring is "file-protected". FILE PROTECT turns on when
the reel is mounted and no writing can occur.
3420 MODELS 4, 6, AND 8
Models 4, 6, and 8 tape units can write and read 6250
bpi tapes with O.3-inch interblock. gaps. Nominal data
rates are 470, 780, and 1250 kilobytes per second at
6250 bpi.
A tape cleaning mechanism is added.
3420 Models 3, 5, and 7 can be converted in the field
to Models 4, 6, and 8.
3803-2/3420
40-001
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
,[
~
.......\
0>..
_-""',
,
/
c
(~i
(;
(
(
"
,/
(/ ( "',,'
(~\
.
c' (
C:
OPER-SUBSYSTEM CONCEPTS (Cont'd)
RECORDING METHODS
6250 BPI
In 6250 bpi mode, 6250 data bytes per inch (246 data
bytes per mm) are recorded in nine parallel tracks on
tape. 6250 bpi tapes are written with an identification
burst (10 burst) in track 1 at load point. The 10 burst is
followed by a control burst and a 0.3-inch (7,62 mm)
IBG before a data block is written.
6250 bpi is a basic density on 3803 Model 2 and on
3420 Models 4, 6, and 8.
6250 BPI ERROR CORRECTION
The 6250 bpi format employs an
error-correcting/ detecting code capable of correcting
all single-track errors on the strength of the code alone
and correcting all double-track errors with the aid of
track pointers. Pointers such as phase error and
incorrect pattern are indications of questionable data. If
the errors fall outside the code capability, Data Check
and Unit Check are set and Error Recovery Procedures
(ERPs) are invoked.
1600 BPI
In 1600 bpi mode, 1600 bytes per inch (63 bytes per
mm) are recorded in nine parallel tracks on tape. The
data format uses eight of the nine bits for data, the
ninth is a parity bit. Data is recorded in odd parity. The
eight bits of one byte can represent an alphabetic
character, zoned decimal digit, two decimal digits
(packed), a special character, or eight binary' bits.
1600 bpi is a basic density on the 3803 Model 2 and on
3420 Models 3, 5, and 7, and a feature on 3420 Models
4,6, and 8.
NINE-TRACK NRZI
In nine-track NRZI. data is recorded at 800 bpi (31,5
bytes per mm) in nine parallel tracks on tape. Data
representation is the same as for 1600 bpi PE. For
nine-track NRZI operation, the dual density feature is
required on a Model 3, 5, or 7 tape unit and the
nine-track NRZI feature is required on a 3803 Model 2.
40-002
SEVEN-TRACK NRZI
In seven-track NRZI mode, data is recorded at 200,
556, or 800 bpi (7, 6/21, 9/31, 5 bytes per mm). The
data format uses six of the seven bits for data and the
seventh bit for parity checking. Data is recorded in
either odd or even parity. The six bits of one character
can represent a BCD character or six binary bits. For
seven-track NRZI operation, a seven-track feature is
required on both a 3420 Model 3, 5, or 7 and on the
3803-2.
INTERBLOCK GAP
An interblock gap (lBG) is the erased section of tape
used to indicate the end of a block or record.
Interblock gaps are:
6250 bpi:
3420 SUBSYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
Model 3
Model 4
ModelS
Model 6
Model 7
Model 8
Tape Speed (Read or Write)
(ips)
(cm/sec)
75
75
125
125
200
200
190.5
190,5
317,5
317,5
508
508
2,3
1.6
4.0
2.9
2.6
6250 Read Access Time, nominal*(ms)
1600 Read Access Time, nominal*(ms)
4.0
6250 Write Access Time, nominal*(ms)
2.1
1.1
0.95
1600 Write Access Time, nominal*(ms)
4.0
3.0
2.9
2.0
2.0
1.28
Forward Start Time, nominal**(ms)
1.8
1.4
1.4
1.1
1.3
.08
Data Rates (Kb/sec; Kd/sec):
6250 BPI
0.3 inch (7,6 mm) nominal.
470/940
1600 BPI PE
120/240
800 BPI NRZI (9-Track)
60/120
120/240
780/1560
200/400
200/400
1250/2500
320/640
Nine-track
800 BPI NRZI (7-Track)
60
100
160
556 BPI NRZI (7-Track)
41.7
69.5
111.2
25.0
40.0
0.6 inch (15,2 mm) nominal;
0.5 inch (12,7 mm) minimum.
0.75 inch (19,05 mm) nominal;
0.68 inch (17,27 mm) minimum.
200 BPI NRZI (7-Track)
15.0
320/640
160/320
100/200
PE/NRZ.:
Seven-track:
1.65
2.0
1.5
Passing Times per Byte (,.sec):
6250 BPI
2.133
1.28
0.80
1600 BPI PE
8.3
MAGNETIC TAPE AND REELS
800 BPI NRZI
16.7
556 BPI NRZI
24.0
14.4
9.0
Most tape volumes that operate satisfactorily on 3420
Models 3, 5, and 7 will operate with equal or better
read/write reliability for an equivalent number of bytes
transferred on 3420 Models 4, 6, or 8. Tape must
conform to IBM Half-Inch Tape Specifications, GA32-0006.
200 BPI NRZI
66.7
40.0
25.0
8.3
5.0
5.0
10.0
3.1
3.1
6.2
Passing Times, IBG (ms):
6250 BPI
4.0
9-track (PE and NRZI)
8.0
7-track (NRZI)
10.0
Rewind Time (2400-foot reel)
8.0
2.4
4.8
4.8
1.5
3.0
3.0
3.75
6.0
60
60
60
60
45
45
66
66
66
66
51
51
10
10
10
10
7
7
Rewind/Unload Time:
(2400-foot reel) (sec)
Load Operation, i!pproximate time (in sec.) to
'tape unit ready' (after reel/cartridge is mounted
and LOAD/REWIND is pressed)
*
Read access time is the interval from initiation of a Forward Read command given to the tape COntrol when tape is not at load point.
until the first data byte is read when tape is brought up to speed from stopped status.
Write access time is the interval from the issuance of a Move command given to the tape unit when tape is not at load point. until the
first data byte is written on tape when tape is brought up to speed from stopped status.
'
**
Start time is the interval from the issuance of a Move command to the tape unit. until tape attains 90% of specified velocity.
40~002
40-003·
OPER-3803 MODEL 2 CONTROLS
3803-2/3420 CONFIGURATIONS
3803 MODEL 2 TAPE CONTROL
ADDRESSING
The 3803 Model 2 Tape Control connects to the I/O
interface of an IBM System/360 Model 50 and above
(by RPQ only) or an IBM System/370. Model 135 and
above. The tape control has a CE panel. two
microprogram control sections. a read section. a write
section. and a channel buffer section.
Every tape unit has a unique device address. which
consists of a channel address. a tape control address.
and a tape unit address. Pluggable jumpers assign the
tape control address when the system is installed. The
tape control has separate device interface connectors
for each tape unit address. A tape unit's address is
determined by the tape control connector to which it is
attached. There is no address decoding at the tape unit
or device interface level.
Note: "I/O Interface" refers to a set of lines over
which the tape control and system channel exchange
control and data signals. Interface lines and operations
are described in IBM System/360 and System/370 I/O
Interface. Channel to Control Unit. Original Equipment
Manufacturers' Information, Order Number GA22-6974.
The 3803 may· exceed an interface signal sequence of
32 microseconds, and may produce a worst case
interface signal sequence of up to 50 microseconds on
some instructions when in seven-track mode with the
two-channel switch feature installed.
Operation with Model 4/6/8 Tape Units (6250 or 1600 bpi
Mode and Models 3/5111600 bpi Tape Units
Operation with Model 4/6/8 Tape Units (6250 or 1600 bpi
Mode) and Model 3/5/7 Tape Units (1600 bpi PE and 800
NRZI Modes)
.
3803 Model 2
Tape Control
3803 Model 2
Tape Control
METERING
Nine Track NRZI Featur.e
A usage meter is installed in the tape control and in
each tape unit. The tape control's usage meter records
elapsed time whenever the METERiNG OUT line is
active and the tape control is in online status (Enabled).
A tape unit's usage meter records elapsed time when
the tape control METERING OUT line is active. tape
unit is loaded. and the tape is not at load point.
METERING IN is used by the central processing unit
(CPU) metering circuits; this line is active from the time
a command is accepted by the tape control until Device
End is generated for that command. See IBM
System/360 and System/370 I/O Interface: Channel to
Control Unit OEMI, Order Number GA22-6974.
he 3803 Model 2 operates at 6250 or 1600 bpi. The
3803 Model 2 with appropriate features can process
nine-track. 800 bpi NRZI and seven-track. 200/556/800
bpi NRZI tape when used with 3420 Model 3. 5. and 7
tape units having the companion NRZI features.
'I
All data transfers are in burst mode. The tape control
executes one command on one tape unit at a time. The
tape control parity checks each data byte transferred
between the system and a tape unit. On write
operations. bus out parity is checked and parity is
generated. if necessary. before the byte is sent to the
tape unit. On read operations. tape control parity is
checked and generated. if necessary. before the byte is
placed on the I/O interface. On sense operations.
correct parity is supplied for each byte. Parity is also
checked on command bytes.
ENABLE/DISABLE SWITCH
This switch allows the tape control and all attached
tape units to be put online or taken offline so a
customer engineer can use the CE panel switches and
indicators to diagnose errors. Whenever the tape
control is placed in offline status (Disabled). the usage
meters in the tape control and all attached tape units
are prevented from running, When the two-channel
switch feature is installed. a second Enable/Disable
switch is provided on the 3803.
I/O commands issued by the channel are executed with
microprograms resident in two independent read-only
storage (ROS) units. One ROS unit controls
communication lines to the channel. while the other
ROS unit controls communication lines to the tape unit.
6250 or 6250/1600
Single Density (1600)
6250 or 6250/1600
Dual Density (1600/800)
Operation with 3420 Model 4/6/8 Tape Units (6250 or
6250/1600 bpi Modes) and Nine and Seven Track Tape Units
(Nine Track 1600 bpi PE and Nine Track 1600/800 bpi and
Seven Track 200/5561800 bpi NRZI Modes)
3803 Model 2
Tape Control
Seven Track Feature
(Nine Track NRZI Feature Prerequisite
"
POWER ON/OFF
SEQUENCING
Normal power on/power off sequencing for the
3803-2/3420 tape subsystem is controlled by system
power interlock circuits. Maintenance activities may
necessitate dropping power in the tape control and
attached tape units while power remains on in the
. system. To take the subsystem offline. see 12-010.
Single Density (1600)
Dual Density (1600/800)
MAXIMUM OF 8 TAPE. UNITS PER TAPE CONTROL
For 3420 Model 8 Power Requirements. see 90-180.
3803-2/3420
40-003
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
o
C) ()
/',.
()
()
c
(~
c
c
cc
6250, 9-Track
Not Applicable
Standard
Not Applicable
6250 Feature
1600,9-Track
Standard
Standard
1600 Feature
6250/1600 Feature
NINE-TRACK NRZI
800, 9-Track
Dual Density Feature
9-Track NRZI Feature
Dual Density Feature
Not Applicable
800, 7-Track
7-Track Feature
7-Track Feature (Note 4)
7-Track Feature
Not Applicable
556, 7-Track
7-Track Feature
7-Track Feature (Note 4)
7-Track Feature
Not Applicable
200, 7-Track
RPQ only
7-Track Feature (Note 4)
7-Track Feature
Not Applicable
SEVEN-TRACK NRZI
(' () C'
DENSITY FEATURE COMBINATIONS
Features available on a 3803 Model 2 are nine-track
NRZI, seven-track (NRZI), two-channel switch, and
device switch. For switch feature descriptions, see
Section 58-005 through 58-111.
The nine-track NRZI feature, available on the 3803
Model 2, permits operation in nine-track NRZI mode.
Nine-track NRZI operation requires a 3420 Model 3, 5,
or 7 Tape Unit with the dual density feature.
c'
40-004
OPER-3803 MODEL 2 FEATURES
3803 MODEL 2 FEATURES
(~
Density (bpi)
(Note 1)
3803-1
3803-2
3420-3/5/7
(Note 2)
3420-4/6/8
(Note 3)
Notes:
1. Density must be specified for each 9-track 3420 tape unit.
2. 3420-3/5/7 can be operated by a 3803-1 or 3803-2.
The seven-track feature permits operation in
seven-track NRZI mode. Seven-track operation with a
3803 Model 2 is at 800/556/200 bpi. The seven-track
feature contains both the data translator and data
converter for seven-track operations. The operation is
similar to that of the 3803-1 with -the seven-track
feature. For seven-track operation, the seven-track
feature on a 3420 Model 3, 5, or 7 and on the 3803
Model 2 is required. The nine-track NRZI feature isa
prerequisite for the seven-track feature on the 3803
Model 2.
3. 3420-4/6/8 can be operated by a 3803-2 only.
4. 9-track NRZI feature is a prerequisite for 7-track feature on 3803-2.
Writing a tape with the translator on causes eight,""bit
bytes from the I/O interface to be written on tape as
six-bit BCD characters; reading such a tape causes
six-bit BCD characters to be translated into their
EBCDIC equivalents. When using the translator, data
rates are not changed and there are no changes- in the
tape unit's operation.
Writing a tape with the data converter on causes four
tape characters (24 data bits) to be written for every
three storage bytes (24 data bits); reading such a tape
reverses the process by converting four tape characters
into three storage bytes. When operating with the data
converter on, the data transfer rate is 75 percent of the
rate with data converter off.
40-004
OPER-TAPE COMMANDS
'40-005
COMMANDS AND INSTRUCTIONS
* indicates the
logical record on which problems
may occur.
COMMANDS
Commands executed by this subsystem fall into one of
the following three categories:
1.
Burst Commands
2.
Motion Control Commands
3.
Non-Motion Control Commands
Write is allowable following a backspace. Assume the
following tape format with labels where *. is used to
denote a TM:
The table on this page and the one on 40-008 list the
subsystem commands a,nd command codes.
Commands not listed will set COMMAND REJECT.
Programming Note: The 3803/3420 subsystem has no
interlocking to prevent improper sequencing of writeand read-type operations that may result in writing
extraneous bits or leaving partial blocks on tape.
Avoiding these improper sequences is a program
responsibility.
Write
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 01
Read Forward
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
02
Read Backward
o
0
OC
Sense
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
04
Sense Reserve
1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
F4
Sense Release
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
04
Request Track-In-Error
Oc 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1B
Loop Write-To-Read
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
8B
For example: R R W* avoid.
W B R W* allowed.
Set Diagnose
0 . :1,· 0 0 1 0 1 1
4B
A read forward-type operation following write-type
operations.
Motion Control Commands
0 1 23456 7 Hex
Rewind
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 07
Rewind Unload
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 OF
Erase Gap
000 1 0 1 1 1
17
W indicates a write-type operation: write, write
TM, or (ERG).
Write Tape Mark
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
lF
Backspace Block
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
27
R indicates a forward read-type operation: read
forward, forward space block, or forward space
file.
Backspace File
0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
2F
Forward Space Block
0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
37
Forward Space File
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
3F
Data Security Erase
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
97
b. When the block or TM read is known to have
been followed by erase record gap (ERG) or is
known to have been the last block written
before a backward operation.
0
o
0 1 1
o
For example: R B W R* avoid.
W B R R* avoid.
B indicates a backward read-type operation: read
backward, backspace block, or backspace file.
311J3-2/3420
I
XG0200
I
2735972
I
_ Seq 2 of 2 • Part Number _
©
See EC
History
0
Diagnostic Mode Set
0 000 1 0 1 1 OB
Mode Set t
See 40-008
Mode Set 2
See 40-008
The burst commands are:
Write
Read Forward
Read Backward
Sense
Sense Reserve
Sense Release
Request Track-In-Error
loop Write-To-Read (maintenance aid*)
Set Diagnose (maintenance aid*)
* Diagnostic programs issue maintenance aid
commands via start I/Os (SIOs) that are
op-codes in the Channel Command Word (CCW).
WRITE
Write records data on tape as it moves forward and
creates an interblock gap (IBG) at the end of each
block. The tape control checks the parity of each data
byte received from the I/O interface.
Command Byte
2.
03
Burst commands transfer data across the channel/tape
control interface. Channel End and Device End are
signaled when the operation is complete (ending
status).
A rewrite of the last data set involves the following
safe and proper sequence. After processing the next to
last end of file (EOF) and TM, read foward to verify the
header (HDR) label of the last data set, backspace,
write a new HDR, and rewrite the data "5et. If a new
data set is being added, the read forward verifies the
second consecutive TM, and thus, the true end of a
data set on this tape. A backspace, write new HDR,
etc., completes the sequence.
0 1 234 5 6 7 Hex
a. When the block or Tape Mark (TM) read is
known to be followed by a TM; A tape mark is
a special block used to separate files.
o
0 0 0 0 1 t
Hex
Read Backward sets the tape unit to backward read
status. The operation of the command is similar to
Read Forward, except that the 7-track NRZI data
converter mode cannot be used. Data flow and
controls are the same as in Read Forward. A Read
Backward, given at load point or into load point, sets
Unit Check. The tape unit remains in backward status
at the end of a Read Backward command.
BURST COMMANDS
* DATA SET * EOF * HDR * DATA SET * EOF **
Burst Commands
A write-type operation after a forward read-type
operation except:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No-Operation
Command Byte
Avoid the following two basic sequences:
1.
Non-Motion Control Commands
Because it may be difficult or impossible to ensure the
above safe situations, a write after read forward
sequence should be used only in applications where
strict control of format and command sequence exists.
VOL HDR
READ BACKWARD
Command Byte
SENSE,
Sense transfers the sense bytes to channel. There are
24 bytes of sense data available. The CCW specifies
the number of sense bytes to be transferred and the
starting storage address. The information transferred
includes unusual conditions associated with the last
operation and provides details about the current
conditions present in the tape control and tape unit. A
sense command addressed to a tape unit that is not
ready will be executed.
SENSE RESERVE
Sense Reserve reserves the addressed tape control for
the channel issuing this command. The tape control
will remain reserved for the channel until either:
•
A Sense Release command is issued from the
reserving channel, or
•
A system reset occurs.
Attempting to select a tape control that is reserved to
another channel results in a Control Unit Busy
indication. The Sense Reserve command should only
be issued by the Control Program.
READ FORWARD
Read Forward sets the tape unit to forward read status.
As the tape moves, data is read until the read head
detects the next IBG. The tape control checks and, if
necessary and possible, corrects the bits of each byte
transferred to the I/O interface. Sensing a tape mark
sets Unit Exception with Channel End and Device End
in the Unit Status byte.
845958
1 Sep 79
40-005
Copyright Imei-natiOnal Business' Machin~s Corporation 1976. 1979
C) ()
,-
()
(~
\..3
("\
\....)
,-
.'
~"\
\,
(-~
;:/-".
;
"
'-
?
\
,
/
"
)
/
ccc
(
C L C
CCC
40-006
OPER-TAPE COMMANDS (Cont'd)
SENSE RELEASE
LOOP WRITE-TO-READ (LWR)
Inhibit Postamble
Sense Release releases the reserved tape control so it
is available to either channel. The Sense Release
command should only be issued by the control
program.
Loop Write-to-Read checks the tape control and tape
unit data and control paths without moving tape. In
6250 or 1600 bpi mode, LWR writes and error checks
the record. In NRZI mode, LWR writes the record but
checks only for Write Trigger VRC errors. Read errors
will occur during the NRZI operation but will be reset
by ALU2 when the LWR operation is completed.
Prevents writing the last 39 zeros of the postamble.
The ending all-ones marker and the first zero is written.
Programming Note: Sense Reserve and Sense
Release commands can only be used on subsystems
having the two-channel switch feature. If these
commands are issued to a tape control without this
feature, COMMAND REJECT results. When using these
commands, they must be the first command in a chain
or COMMAND REJECT results.
The Sense Reserve and Sense Release commands are
not supported by IBM Operating Systems.
REQUEST TRACK-IN-ERROR (REQUEST TIE)
Request TIE returns to the tape control a data byte
containing track-in-error information for 9-track and
sensing level information for 7-track tape units. This
information is transmitted to the channel in sense byte
2 on a Sense command following a Read, Read
Backward, Write, or Loop Write to Read command.
When issued following a 6250 bpi or PE operation,
Request TIE is treated as a No Operation (NOP Reset
Sense.
When issued following a 9-track NRZI read operation, a
Request TIE either:
•
•
Enables the tape control to perform a correction
read operation if the data byte contains a single
bit, or
Does not enable the tape control to 'perform a
correction read operation if the data byte contains
bits 6 and 7, which indicate an uncorrectable error.
When issued following a 7-track read operation, the
Request TIE byte controls the read clipping level in the
following sequence:
Second attempt-Middle, Level
Third attempt-Low Level
Fourth' attempt-H igh Level
Clipping levels are cyclically altered in this way as long
as read attempts result in Vertical Redundancy Check
(VRe) errors.
On 9-track 3420 tape units, a LWR command issued at
beginning-of-tape (BOT) is executed in 1600 bpi mode.
Elsewhere on tape, LWR is executed in the current
operating mode of the tape unit.
LWR does not require the tape unit to be in write
status, but the tape unit must be ready. Execution of
an LWR does not change the status of the tape unit.
An LWR performed from the processing unit uses the
same data path as a Write command.
SET DIAGNOSE '4B'
Set Diagnose is used to call microdiagnostic routines.
Bytes are transferred from channel to the tape control
to modify the operation of succeeding commands in
the chain.
FLAG BYTE 1
Bit
Write
Read
0
Diagnostic Write
N/A
1
N/A
IBG Measure
2
Inhibit Postamble
Read Access
Variable Go-down Time
Two bytes (flag bytes 3 and 4) are sent to the tape
control unit. These bytes are used to control the wait
time before starting the next operation in the chain
following the Set Diagnostic (48) command.
Count values are:
103.15
Microseconds to decrement one count.
27
Milliseconds to decrement the low order
counter 256 ('FF) counts and cause one
decrement of the high order count.
Inhibit Preamble
Prevents writing the first 39 zeros of the preamble. The
last (40th) zero and the beginning all-ones marker is
written.
0
Block Data Check
1
N/A
2
Block Interrupts
3
Force Control Unit Busy
4-7
N/A
FLAG BYTE 3 (OPTIONS)
DMR
Go-Up Time in tack pulses
GOT
Hi order byte of go-down count
TUBO Mask
Byte used to mask TU Bus Out
FLAG BYTE 4 (OPTIONS)
DMR
Go-down time measure count equivalent to tach
pulses. No tach pulse when tape is not moving.
GOT
Lo order byte of go-down count.
Write data is sent to the tape unit. In the MST board it
is gated to the read circuits and then returned to the
tape control unit for read checking.
Set TUBO Mask
Flag byte 3 is used as a mask to control the tape unit
Bus Out. Any bit on in flag byte 3 causes that tape unit
Bus Out bit to be held active, and thus prevents the
tape unit from writing data for that specific bit.
3
Var Go-down Time
Var Go-down Time
Inhibit Preamble
N/A
Change Direction
5
LWR
DMR
6
TUBD Mask
N/A
7
Change Direction
ChanQe Direction
Change' Direction allows the following word (CCW)
chain to progress through turnaround, if necessary, and
up to the point of activating the Move line to the tape
unit. At this point, the operation is terminated. The'
tape unit is left in forward or backward, write or read
status, depending on the operation follow the Change
Direction instruction.
Performs the same function as the 'OB' command.
Description
Bit
Loop Write-To-Read
4
Diagnostic Write
FLAG BYTE 2
PE - causes writing to be inhibited in any track
when the write data contains successive one bits.
NRZI -
9 track - Inhibits writing P bits.
7 track - Inhibits writing C bits.
40-006
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
(~
OPER-TAPE COMMANDS (Cont'd)
40-007
MOTION CONTROL COMMANDS
ERASE RECORD GAP (ERG)
Motion control commands move tape but do not
transfer information across the channel/tape control
interface.
Erase Record Gap causes the selected tape unit to
move tape forward and erase tape as follows:
Single ERG
All motion control commands operate as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Channel End is signaled when the command is
accepted (initial status).
For commands other than Rewind/Unload, device
end is signaled when the operation is completed
(ending status).
The tape control responds with BUSY if the tape
control is addressed while executing the command.
As a result, th~ 3803 is obligated to present a CUE
interrupt to the channel that received the BUSY as
soon as the current operation is complete.
Note: For Rewind/Unload, Channel End is signaled in
initial status, and Device End, Control Unit End, and
Unit Check are signaled in an interrupt status cycle
after the command becomes effective at the tape unit.
Device End is signaled again when the operator reloads
tape, presses START, and the tape unit goes from
not-ready to ready providing the tape control has not
been offline in the interim.
Motion control commands are:
Rewind
Rewind/Unload
Erase Gap
Write Tape Mark
Backspace Block
Backspace File
Forward Space Block
Forward Space File
Data Security Erase
Rewind causes the selected tape unit to rewind tape to
load point.
REWIND UNLOAD (RUN)
Rewind Unload causes the selected tape unit to rewind
tape to load point, removes tape from the columns,
finishes winding tape onto the 'right reel, closes the
cartridge (if used), and opens the window.
©
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
',,-)
\... .
"--'
('1
',,--~
Successive ERGs
6250 bpi
3.75 in. (95,3 mm)
3.45 in. (87,6 mm)
1600 bpi and
800 bpi 9-track
4.2 in. (106,7 mm)
3.6 in. (91 A mm)
7-track
4.5 in. (114,3 mm)
3.75 in. (95,3 mm)
WRITE TAPE MARK (WTM)
Write Tape Mark causes the selected tape unit to move
tape forward and write a tape mark block.
At 6250 and 1600 bpi, a WTM causes the subsystem to
write a tape mark preceded by an Erase record gap.
Data Check, Equipment Check, and Unit Check can be
set during a Write Tape Mark (WTM) operation.
Attempting to write a tape mark on a file-protected
tape unit sets COMMAND REJECT.
BACKSPACE BLOCK (BSB)
Backspace Block causes tape to move backward to the
next interblock gap or to load point, whichever comes
first, No data bytes are transferred. Channel End is
signaled when the command is accepted. Device End is
signaled at the next interblock gap or load point.
Sensing a tape mark sets Unit Exception, with Device
End in the status byte. Backspadng into or at load
point sets Unit Check with Device End in the status
byte. The tape unit remains in backward status.
BACKSPACE FILE (BSF)
REWIND (REW)
('", (,'J ,0'
FORWARD SPACE BLOCK (FSB)
("'1
"-...j
0
U
0
"'--y!
()
Backspace File causes the selected tape unit to move
tape backward to the interblock gap on the load point
side of a tape mark, or to load point, whichever comes
first. No data bytes are transferred. Unit Exception is
not set when tape mark is sensed.
Backspacing into or at load point sets Unit Check with
Device End in the status byte. Device End is signaled
at the completion of the operation. The tape unit
remains in backward status.
o
C)
o
C)
Forward Space Block causes the selected tape unit to
move tape forward to the next interblock gap. Initial
status contains Channel End. Sensing a tape mark sets
Unit Exception, with Device End in the status byte.
FORWARD SPACE FILE (FSF)
Forward Space File causes the selected tape unit to
move tape forward to the interblock gap beyond the
next tape mark. No data bytes are transferred. Initial
status contains Channel End. Device End is signaled at
the completion of the operation. Sensing the tape mark
does not set the Unit Exception bit.
Programming Note: The tape control responds with a
Control Unit Busy sequence while performing an ERG,
WTM, BSB, BSF, FSB, or FSF operation.
Device End is signaled when the EDT marker is sensed
during a normal DSE completion. However, a sense
command should be performed to assure EDT was
reached. Upon completion of the DSE, the operating
program must issue sufficient erase gap commands to
ensure erasure of any data written beyond the EDT
marker. Issuing 14 erase gap commands, which erases
about 4 feet (1,22m) of tape, is generally sufficient.
The channel must be enabled for interrupts to detect a
Unit Check condition due to manual intervention. When
Device End is signaled, a sense command should be
performed to ensure the tape unit reached EDT.
The Data Security Erase command is not currently
supported by IBM Operating Systems. DOS supports
DSE via a Magnetic Tape Command (MTC).
DATA SECURITY ERASE (DSE)
Data Security Erase causes the selected tape unit to
erase tape from the point at which the operation is
initiated until the end-of-tape marker is sensed.
The DSE command is accepted by the tape control only
when chained immediately following an Erase Gap
command. Receipt of this command under any other
condition results in COMMAND REJECT. If the
command is accepted, initial status contains Channel
End, and Device End is signaled when the operation is
complete. An attempt to erase a file-protected tape
sets COMMAND REJECT. Unit Exception never occurs
as a result of this command. Data Security Erase at
end of tape (EDT) causes an immediate ending
sequence. The tape control does not remain busy after
initial selection. An attempt to select the tape unit
while executing a DSE results in busy status.
During DSE execution, the tape unit monitors erase
head current to ensure that tape is erased. If erase
head failure is detected, the operation is terminated by
dropping TAPE UNIT READY. Device End and Unit
Check are issued as a result of dropping READY. At
the completion of a DSE, the tape control presents
Device End to channel.
Programming Note: If the tape unit drops ready or
fails logically during DSE, the ending status containing
Device End and sense byte 7, bit 4 (Erase Head Failure)
is also set.
r)·.
"'-.:
~O-OQ7
/
)
c () c
c
(
c
C" ('.
I
C~
"
!
\
. /'
OPER-TAPE COMMANDS (Cont'd)
NON-MOTION CONTROL COMMANDS
DIAGNOSTIC MODE SET (OMS)
Non-motion control commands do not move tape and
do not transfer data across the channel/tape control
interface.
DMS causes an artificial signal-loss condition that
checks read and write error detection circuits.
Channel End and Device End are signaled when
non-motion control commands are accepted (initial
status).
Non-motion control commands are:
No-Operation
Mode Set 1
Mode Set 2
Diagnostic Mode Set (maintenance aid)
NO-OPERATION (NOP)
NOP performs no function in the tape control or tape
unit, and does not transmit data or move tape. NOP
does not reset tape control sense data.
• At 6250 bpi, track P is made all zeros and the
program supplies the error correcting code as part of
the data.
Mode Set Commands
Set Density
200
556
Parity
800
Odd
X
X
On
Off
On
X
• At 6250 bpi Diagnostic Read inhibits single- and
double-track error corr check characters to channel
with data.
X
X
X
X
X
• At 1600 bpi, whenever write data contains
successive one bits in any track, writing in that track
is inhibited until the last one bit is reached.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Command Byte
Off
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hex
X
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
13
X
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
23
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
2B
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
33
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
3B
X
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
53
X
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
63
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
6B
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
73
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
7B
X
X
• In 9-track NRZI mode, no bits are written in track P.
X
X
X
• In 7-track NRZI mode, no bits are written in track C.
X
X
X
X
X
X
A Diagnostic Mode Set command affects only
operations for the command chain in which it is issued.
X
X
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
93
X
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
A3
X
X
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
A-B
X
1 0
1
1
0
0
1
1
B3
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
BB
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
03
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
C3
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
CB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
Mode Set 2 19-Track)
800
1600
MODE SET 1 (MS 1)
Mode Set 1 commands sent to tape controls with the
7-track NRZI feature establish an operating mode for
succeeding 7-track NRZI operations. Bits 0 and 1
control density (200/556/800 bpi) and bits 2, 3, and 4
control parity (odd or even). data converter (on or off!.
and translator (on or off) circuits in the tape control.
See chart on this page.
Even
Translator
Mode Set 1 (7-Track) (See Note)
X
Programming Note: Placing a NOP command at the
end of a series of chained commands delays channel
disconnect fro'm the tape control until the NOP is
executed. Indiscriminate use of this command delays
the channel program, and may contribute to a channel
overload condition.
Data Converter
6250
X
X
X
Note: Seven-track Mode Set 1 commands are treated as 'NOP reset sense' when issued to a tape control without the
seven-track NRZI compatibility feature,
A Mode Set 1 command affects operation of all 7-track
tape units attached to the tape control. Unless reset,
the tape control retains its mode setting until it receives
another Mode Set command. .
MODE SET 2 (MS 2)
Mode Set 2 commands sent to a 3803 Model 2, set the
operating mode for succeeding write-type operations.
Modes are: 6250 bpi, 1600 bpi PE, or 800 bpi
nine-track NRZI. Unless reset, the tape control retains
its mode setting until it receives another Mode Set
command.
40-008
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
OPER-TAPE COMMANDS (Cont'd)
I/O INSTRUCTIONS
In addition to initiating one of the I/O operations by
means of the Start I/O (SIO) instruction. the program
can cause certain actions at the tape control by using
the Test I/O and Halt I/O instructions.
TEST I/O
A Test I/O instruction performed by the Central
Processing Unit (CPU). causes the status byte for the
selected tape unit to be sent to the channel for
analysis. No actual operation is performed.
Note: A Test I/O command issued to a not ready tape
unit results in a contingent connection on tape control
units with the two-channel switch.
HALT I/O
A Halt I/O instruction causes data transfer to stop. The
tape control disconnects from the channel and
proceeds independently to the completion of the
operation. When the operation is completed. the tape
control tries to re-establish connection with the channel
to transfer ending status. If addressed while
completing the operation. the tape control returns a
BUSY signal.
If a Halt I/O instruction is executed after STATUS IN
and befpre tape motion is started during a Write or
Read operation. the operation is canceled. and Channel
End. Device End. Unit Check. and Data Check are
generated.
© c'.opyrig.h~,. In,te,"a~BUSiness. Machines c.orS,ration 1976. 1979
(',
('l
,,/
'"j
(')
~/
(',
0
(
",-, '
0
\~
r),
\....
() ()
o
40-009
/
"":.
)
)
)
{
c' c
"
(~
(:
,
L
(,
(
(
(
(4
<:
{
('
('
('
(
("
--
OPER-CHANNEl BUFFER CIRCUIT
(
(, ('
"-
(~
---,'
/
(",
( ('
50-000
"'"
y
READ/WRITE FLOW LOGIC
See 6250 Write
Service Requirements
on5~20.
Write and
Tape Op
f'
' " Bus Out Chan A:
//
FC06l
,..
PC
rI
I
I
I
>)
1------..
I
I
~us Out
F~C-08-1-"
Re.d end
- ';;0 Chan;;; s:itch - - -,
I
Bus Out Chan B _~~.
i
61
Switched toB
..
<:c(~
Write
Byte
Buffer
f
CRC
Generator
A
53-066
A1D2
Shift
CRC A
FClll
'.ntl
. .B.u.S.ln. . .I'~~~. . .C.h~a~n.B---. . . .
XM191
PG
I
I
XM161
I
I
I
BK011
Gate Chan
Bus Out
to ALU
x
CRC
D
L
Channel
Buffer
Controls
Al F2 BR031
l ...:....,:....Jr----.....,
53-030
CRC
Gen
Store CRC D
Shift CRC C
C
53-066 •
A1D2
BK021
BK031
1-5
50-003
High Serial Bits
OR
Low Serial Bits
Intl Bus
See 6250 Read
Service Requirements
on 50-030.
/~
~91
In Chan A
f
Switched to A
~
FC261
OR
A2R2
Fe171
A2R2
-.
B
53-066 ..._
A1C2
..
A Read Reg
BS081
Bus In
Reg
A
t-FC211
A
Chan Bus
In
OR t--
A
t-Al
C2
Reg
52-040
A
Bus In
Assembly
BS071
A2R2
FC171
1-1
FROM READ DATA FLOW LOGIC
50-002
Shift CRC B
CRC
Gen
Feature Code Bits
TO WRITE DATA FLOW LOGIC
50-001
' - - CRIC/CROC
Controls
53-035
53-066
A1D2
2-1
1-2
9 x 32
Reg
___ .J
Channel Buffer Out
~
BR031
A1F2
I_
Bus
Out
Check
=1
Channel
Buffer
_ . .~----.....~
~
53-<>45
L.-.
*
Pad Gate
BR031
I
I
I
Write Pulse
- : R e : g : - 1 - - - - -...-
Tape o p !
-..;.-.....;.--"-'~
~.I
PC I-.;..;X_M_O...
B...
1 ...
1_ _.......
I
I
B2M2
;:1--I11!....-I-1..
53-040
OR
Switched to A
Set
Write Regs
Bus Ripple Bit
1-----t-----Dead Track
Tie Down
53-055
OR
....."':'1'
Set A Rd Buffer
A1C2
BS051
BS051
B Read Reg
-
Reg
1-
140
Set. Rd . _
53-055
A1C2
BS051
50-003
50-000
•
/
OPER~WRITE
CIRCUITS
50-001
WRITE DATA FLOW LOGIC
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
Channel
Buffer
Out
I
Write
Translator
and Data
Converter
57-020
57-025
-
I
A1E2
I
I
BN011-BN31l
I
OR
DOT
(9)
~
BR10l
XC601
'\
..
Write
Heads
~ II
To Control
Circuits
~--7""""-_.J
Without 7-Track
Feature. install
jumpers
..
BR101
50-000
..
---'0."
"
-
-a
1-2
-
I
I
I
Write
Drivers
r---
Residual or CRC A
Write
Coildition
Channel
Buffer Gate
A
Write Group Buffer
OR
~I
-
Set Byte 2
A
••
~
-
53-065
ORC
Generator
Set Byte 3
A
~
A1G2
BWi31
.
~
Write
CRC
Generator
- - - - -
Set Byte 1
A
Al
G2
~
Writ"!
Bus
BW12l
Set Byte 4
I
Set Write
Group Buffer 2
53-045
I
I Serializer
5 Buses
-X-
A2 (01010)
TUBO
Write
Triggers
53-070
;'
A1H2
BW06lBW081
Mark 1
Mark 2
1
Write
Tgr
VRC
Cntr 1
Cntr 2
A1H2
A1H2
BWOOl
BW011BW051
Cntr 4
A1H2
FD021
BW011BW051
Format
53-020
A1G2
Format
Control
'8W1'll
Write
Clock
and
Controls
53-020
xWrite
Bus
Control
,
I
Al (10101) "
, '"
-"~-
~.
-
Write
Encoder
A1G2
Write
, Group
Buffer
Control
,
53-025
BW151
-
1-4
~
Write
Counter
53-025
53-020
Wrt entr == 0
L~
A
From TU Bus Out Register
50-003
~
II.-
1-3
3803-2/3420
Wrt Cntr = 0 and WC 0
50-003
© Copyright International Business Machines CorporatIon 1976. 1979
r--~
!)
0 () 0 0 0
o o
o
50~1
00
,~,
r.""
/"'"i
,_
;I
()
~,
(
c
c c
(~.
(,~
(
(
'
(_.,
~','
j
c
c () c
C'·
/
./
/'
50-002
OPER-READ CIRCUITS
READ DATA FLOW LOGIC
c'· (_.,
50-003
(to Spec Reg)
isev~-':;c;Fe-;u~
I
I
,.
I
I
I
Read
Translator
~~~v~~~r
57-021
57-026
A1E2
I
.----------------------4
I
f+
t---- X ---------------.
6:t~ct
1..
Data Flow
NRZI Read
at a
. .,..(.DI-• .)
57-006
I
I
I
I
NRZI
I
2-2
Read
Read
Preamps
X.J~~
_:.::.i:.I;_. ._ _
P
Heads
I
III
ion
Y1R2
Y1S2
Y1T2
~
~ B~0~-BN3~ J
VFC Controls
CB111-131
.......
.~
CA 111-331
CB121-131
Read
CRC
53-065
Y1D2
Read
Data
Without 7-Track
Feature, install jumpers
50-000
BR111
-
--
.......
ECC
Group Buffer
ECC Buffer
OR
,),..~......-
1-5
CN011
I-
Combined
ECC Data P, 0-7
--
Reg
1X 9
......._
.. 8x9
OE
0-7
....- t
_Y_1G_2,..14CJ031-041
Set ECC Buffer
Y1G2
CJ031-041
Y1K2
Y1L2
Y1M2
Read
CyCle
Controls
VFC
Prime Data
53-095
CD181,281.381
Xlate
Buffer
Track
Xlate Xlator
lx9 • ......O.u.t... Array
Group
Buffer
I
Data
Out
5 Buses..:J 5 ,x 9
Skew
Buffer
VFC Data
32x27 ....._ _ _. . . .
Logic
...
Correc'tion
Data
-
Y1G2
CJ031-041
--
ECC
Correction
Matrix
--
Pointer
System
~
-
Y1K2
Y1L2
Y1M2
Set Xlate
Buffer
53-090
-
CD181 ,281 ,381
...
-
Y1F2
CE011-,101
~
Y1G2
Y1K2
Y1L2
Y1M2
-a-_....
CD18,1-381
GB Adr
Ctr
Y1K2
Y1L2
Y1M2
53-090
pOin~
-
CD181-381
Pointers
FL (9)
53-045
f4
Format &
Invalid
I Format
Character
DeteCtion Char
. _... L09iC
Y1K2
Y1L2
Y1M2
CD191-391
Y1K2
Y1L2
Y1M2
-
Phase Error
__ PE Phase Error
. . . -------1114
RICROC
53-080
CD121-341
Sample HOB
53-080
-
Skew
Detection
53-085
Y1K2
Y1L2
Y1M2
~
Gated
StepRIC .........
Dead
Track
53-080 .....
~. ._ .. Control
Y1 K2
-53-075
Y1L2
Y1P2
Y1M2
CD161 ,261 ,361
CC031-111
CD191-391
Excessive Skew
(To Sense)
Y1 H2
Invalid
..........- .. Char
CH151
50-002
OPI:R-MP1/MP2CIRCUITS
MICROPROCESSORS (MP1/MP2) SCHEMATIC
50-000
~
~
Chan
Tags
In
Reg
MICROPROCESSOR 1
E
FC161
"I
a: .,
(/J
A2R2
!
-'
C
C
PC
X cS'"
Xfr LSRI to XOUTA
-*.
AB371
PG
l
I- ~
52-025
A2T2
. AB391
XO~~B
Xfi' XINB
52~025
to LSR
•
~
Xfr XOUTB to
Not Clock 4
A~OI
OR
B Bus
. .~~·1--1-~
...~. .~...,.J..,
~......~~~4
B Bus
Xfr LSR to A Reg
Xlr TU Adr
~
B2C2
AB361
I
.4oB471
F0031
I
I
.!.
B2C2
B202
ABlll
Xlr
Decode
T
B Bus
52101
A2T2
PC
ROS Reg 8202 AB051 52-030 B2E2 AB061
all
21314
51 6
AB191
7 819 IOH121131415
Branch
~QB101
lo IC
Read Only Storage Array (ROS)
B2C2
...
B2H2
Br Cond
(32)
8202
A2T2
B2M2
J 52-086
~"'-s~e-t~I~C---'
40R~X.
AB091
AB121-171
I Gale B Bus to IC
QB031-061
H,IC
STO
STO
BOC
BOC
XFR
XFR
BU
unused
ORI
aRM
ADD
AD[)M
AND
ANDM
XO
XOM
4---7
_.BI'IB.U.S
..
Field 2
0000
0001
00 1 O·
00 1 1
01 00
01 01
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
LSR Addr
LSR Addr
Condition
Condition
LSR Addr
LSR Addr
HI ROS Addr
Constant
Constant
Address
Address
location
Location
Lo ROS Addr
LSR
LSR
LSR
LSR
LSR
LSR
LSR
LSR
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Constant
Corlstant
Constant
Constant
TU Tag
Reg
AA221-271
N.O.t.CI.OC.k.4. . . . XI
~
,
Xlr LSR to A Reg
A2R2
A Reg
52-030
A2N2
AA331
Xlr LSR
to TU Tag
A Bus
~A~~lU'21
Inst
Decode
"'++-I~
A2N2
A2N2
PC
AA111
o
-
Br Cond
Xfr
Decode
52-101
A2L2
AA171
IC look
Ahead
AA081
I
I Branch Set IC
.. :\
I
4 _ _......
1 _.:.7 8
3.:..
~~--~
A2D2 A2M2
A2Q2
32 Branch
Conditions
52-087
LX
•
F0041
A2N2
Stat
XC041-051
~>
OR
Xfr lSR2 to
AA121-141
To,
Tape
Unit
I
~x--
52-015
8 - 15, P
Op Code Field 1
Addr
Addr
Addr
Addr
Addr
Addr
Addr
Addr
F0021
_.I.•~..
A2M2
AA351
A2M2
AB181
AB061
52-010
Stat
Reg
~
B2E2
IC look
Ahead
_
AA401
0123
A2R2
~AA331
AA291-3'gl·
PC
XOUTB
A2Q2
AB411
~8_ _ _~1____~15
~
15
..;..4_.&...._7~
_0~~~3
I
Slats B, C, and 0 to Microprocessor 2
52015
B-- ~
AA391
TU Adr Select
I
Stat
Reg
AA361
52-045 """
Local Storage Regs
(LSRs)
52-015
2
. . .A2.N.2_.:
.
..
:M.07.1 _
A2Q2
Xfr LSRI to Stat
ALU
AB321·331
52-025
I
I
Inst
Decode
Chk
I Xlr LSR2 to
A2Q2
AA381
Stats B. C. and 0 to Microprocessor 1
AB301
XOUTA
I
A2R2
B2C2
Xlr lSR2 to
I
XOUTA
I. Xlr XINB to LSRI I
From Hdwr Error Lth
OR
0 Bus
B Bus
LSR
Adr
....
AA461
TU Bus
Out
Reg
::::: I
Clock 15
~~~~------::---------I5f-025"t-X·OU·T·B-~·::bl
AB441
52-030
AB301
A Bus
:2:e:
X
I---X
TU Adr
Set
Reg
~Xlr
LSR2 to TUBO
A2T2
I
A2Q2
L::J
A Reg
F0011
I
AB181
Xlr XINA to LSRI
B2C2
R
~ ~!:~1 . .roORR-. . .,.. - ..-.
",X.
Trap ALU2
~
MICROPROCESSOR 2
Not Clock 21
AB231-281
AB071
Reg
~~~:5
1-4
f----;I:-·~:~~;,::,;~.Jlr--------.;......;~-----1-----I~A.!!A~4!;3;Jl
Local Storage Regs
(LSRs)
52-015
B2C2
--
.:...._..-:O:;';R;-'
tt-----I¥lI,Hr A2T2
Clock 15
- - - - - - - ) ( 0 Bus
LSR
Adr
Chk
*___II
Xlr XINA to LSR2
XOUTAt-......_ _ _ _ _ _
DReg
52-035
B2C2
AB341
50-001
'f4
-- - - - -- -l- --'-~~ Tu.ol-;~s:pec--""~~~~.roO;RR~l
Not Clock 21
OR
III
52-040
,X,.
~1
B Bus
x-
50-002
GJ '
2-1
)(~~a~~:lB~S In II
FC291
5()-001
50-000
ROS Reg A2M2 AA061 52-030 A2L2 AA051
A2l2
low IC
Read Only Storage Arr'!y (ROS)
X
I
15
-~--~-----
1
x-
Gate B Bus to IC
AA1S1
A2H2
AA091
QA031-061
AA091
AB071
AA101
"
,
© Copyright International Business Machii",s'Corporation 1976. 1979
o o o o
o o
()
o
~,
/
.")
"'---,)'
',,-- '
o
50-003
''''-'' ..
./
c~
C,'"-
c' C
"
c
( ._-
'
-.-~
OPER-ROS
..
ROS 1 TRAP CONDITIONS
•
-Initial
Selection AB CE AB171",
I!r-...
+General Reset
Chan A B FC041
+ROSl Error FC151
-Selective Reset FC15~
II
Trap ROSl
A
~-Trap
OR
I - - OR
ROSl
A
'"
•
~-
AS'.'
t
-System Reset
ABOll--""",,-
A
""
........
N
r--
A
............ r--
+5.12 MHz
r-....
OR
OR
FC141
~
FC141
FC141
"I
~
~
'"'"-
+ Hardware Error AlU 1
........
A
OR
r....
-CE Select Reg Pulse
-Reset/Err Mode
........
b
~
-Any ROS Hardware Err............
-Panel Enable
+Reset Sw N/O
+ Reset
•
A
A
t--
.........
~
i
........
r-SS
PSOll
t--
PSOll
A
OR
PS011
........
OR
PSOll
~
+CE Reset
Sw
-
OR
FC141
b
-
+Mach
Reset
2l
,System
........
Reset ABOll
N
DOT
AB091
OR
---
~
-B Bus 0-7
~
8-15
FF
-N
-Gate B Bus to IC ~
1
A
I Reset IC
J
AB011
A
r--
OR
A
Lo IC ROS
AB09~
AB031
OR
A
FC141
-
Pj
l'.... N
" " -Mach Resets
+Mach Reset
Harderr A
~1
FC141
Harderr B
FC141
AlU2 Clock
AA011
ALU2 0 Bus Parity
AA361
To;
ALU2 IC Control Errors AA451
AB371
75-12'5 And Xfr
......
-Maoh Reset
+Mach Reset
ALU2 Stat A & B AA411
AlUl Stat A & B A8421
Sel Sig Chan A
FC011
Sel Out, CUE
FC031
Metering
FC041
TU Sel Reg
. F0031
TU Tags Reg
F0041
Sel Sig Chan B
XM011
Sel Out, CUE Chan B XM031
Metering, Chan B
XM041
Sw to A, Sw to B XM101
To:
A
AB181
{VFC Swlleh
7-Tk Clip level
CE In Tags
Intf BOC
CAl 00
CN071
PR181
AB161
Sys Xfr Rst
OR
AB181
T'
o.
..J"'o...
ROS Reg 11 AlUl ............
ThrOugh" are
conditions which trap ROS 1
OR
FC141
FC141
•
+ Reset
ROS1 IC
7F
h
Reset 4
OR
FC141
~
OR
ALUl 0 Bus Parity
N
A
.........
N
A
~r--
~
A
or Start/Stop Sw N/C ' " I - A
-Power Reset FC271
OR
'"
~
1.04 usec
OR
........
A
.....t:::a
-
50 ns Tap ""
Reset 3
~
~
A
OR
./
.,
OR
-Xfr B Bus to IC ""
AB181
-
,;.,.'
.-/
50-010
-100 ns TaP ............
A
r-.
-Reset/Cmpr Mode
A
AB021
AB031
AB041
ALUl Clock Output
AlUl Clock Gating
AlU 1 Clock Powering
J
.......
-Gate Trap Pulse
-Panel Enable
{ IC Co.,rol Em". AlU' AA451
r-....
C ("'" (,.
-Branch Set IC ROS1.r-..,
Reset 2
-
A
T'
o.
OR
A
~
""-
FC141
-General
Reset Chan A B
ALUl CI DC k
A
'" t-OR
FC141
~
Reset 1
25 ns Trap ROS1.........
+Lock ROSl IC
c
·c
~
lB..'
Clook Toml"..
IC Clock Errors
lO Inst. Ctr Ptk Ck
Inst. Card Errors AlUl
Hdwe Error latches
Reset Emit Addr
1.
AA011
AA451
AB10l
AB381
AB471
FC151
Reset Sense Data
·~ClookTlm'
~
To:
A
ROS Reg 14 AlUl ' "
....
Write Service Controls
Chnl Buffer Addr Ck
Write Data Parity Error
Write Tgr VRC
Command Hold Reg
AB011
BS031
BS061
BW141
BW161
BW231
AB181
50-010
OPER-ROS (Cont'd)
50-011
ROS 1 TRAP CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
Both hardware and microprograms generate resets.
Types of resets are General. Selective, and Machine.
[1] GENERAL RESET resets all flags, stats, and reserve
bits that apply to the selecting interface.
[2] SELECTIVE RESET performs the same functions
except the Control Unit Reserve and Hold Interface
bits are not reset.
[3] POWER ON RESET and CE panel resets generate
MACHINE RESET. Turning power on and pressing
RESET both generate POWER ON RESET. POWER
ON RESET clears some LSRs and initiates
INTERFACE CHECKOUT. Channel outbound tags
are checked to ensure all are inactive and all
inbound tags except OPIN are activated. Contents
of the CHANNEL BUS IN register are sent to
CHANNEL BUS OUT.
'
[4] INITIAL SELECTION AB CE traps RPS 1 to 000 at
each selection of the tape control.
[5] LOCK ROS 1 IC traps ROS 1 to 000 when an ALU
1 hardware error occurs.
MP2 is activated for the proper reset afte'r Stat B
has been set on or off to reset only the selecting
interface. CONTROL UNIT BUSY is activated for
the duration of the reset and is deactivated at
completion of MP2 reset.
If MP2 has hardware errors, the tape control "hangs
up" with BUSY active and loops on a trap address.
If all steps are completed correctly, the reset is
finished. Any failure "hangs up" the tape control at a
trap address and BUSY remains active.
© COPYri9ht International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
:~
o
50-011
C)
'\
(
"
., /
j
''',
)
/
'" "/
c c
C
c: c
(
/
(
(
(
(:'
(', (~ (~
C
("
(~
C
(~~
(/
C
./
OPER-6250 BPI
(:' C~
C· (
c c50-020
C· (~
(~
6250 WRITE SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
The write buffers fill automatically at the maximum rate
permitted by the control unit, cable, and channel
delays. This diagram shows when byte requirements
occur. The channel must respond only to the average
need during the period of overrun, checking such that
at least one ECC (error correction code) group remains
in control unit buffers at all times until stop occurs.
Note that no individual channel byte transfer is overrun
checked.
36 bytes are pre-buffered and one ECC group or more
must remain in the buffer at all times prior to Stop.
This time could permit some data chaining or be
considered a safety factor.
Request
bytes at
maximum
data rate
n
Byte requirements are
governed by tape data
rate after thiS pOint
>900 usec @ 200 IpS
I
(S~e Note'1 )
32
,,_ _ _ _ _ _ _......
Initial
Selection
~
Start
Tape
\
A
Data Group
B
A
B
A
B
A
A
B
A
B
'-------'------..InL..--..-r1JlJ1J1
Tape Full Speed.
Gap crossed
.. -ro
Preamble
Written
~t--- Overrun Checked
-*t. . . . .
preamble------........ - - - - - - D a t a - - - - - -...
Resync
.. , ..
Burst
(See Note 2)
Data
-------<.....1.........-
Resync
Burst
-1
p
Repeat to
End
(See Note 2)
Notes:
[1]
Proportionately more on lower speed tape units.
[2]
The Resync Burst consists of a mark 1 group, 2 sync groups,
and a mark 2 group. It is interleaved in a block of data after
every 158 data groups, and is used to re-synchronize the read
circuits during a 6250 read operation.
© Copyright Internationa' Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
50-020
50..030
OPER-6250 BPI (Cont'd)
6250 READ SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
The channel buffer and both read byte buffers are
empty at the start. Overrun is called only if there is
insufficient room in the buffer for a waiting ECC group.
The ECC rate varies according to corrections required
but follows the tape rate average over periods of 50
bytes or more. The channel has until the postamble
end to accept all data from the buffer. Note that no
individual data transfer is checked for overrun. To
overrun, the buffer fills during a channel lag.
There is excess read buffer capacity equivalent to 10
usec* available for "slip" or possible data chaining.
The time may be distributed or lumped. Overrun check
effectively starts at the 34th byte since that is the total
buffer capacity.
Overrun Checked
. r,4thBvt.
ECC
Group
-
800 usee @ 200 bpi*
Present
bytes at •
maximum
data rate
ECC
Group
-
ECC
Group
-
ECC
Group
_____Il
·r,
I·
I
I
I
r,
I
I
Two groups of 7
are skipped for
Resyhc Burst
1,""",
Begin
Block
Selection
.........- - - - - - - - - Data
----------t--+o...----
I
I
ECC
Group'
n
ECC
'Group
ECC
Group-
ECC.
Group
n n n________
Resync Burst - - - -.............- - - - - Data
~
-----.-.f
ECC
. Group
~r-1
_________
~Data
Bytes
Variable
depending on
block length
End of
Data
Mark
~I----- Approximately 50 byte
.,
times to empty buffer of
all contents
r~OpYrig~ernati~usineS~~~lJnes ~atlon
',,--_)
\c }
"'-/
~y
'0
r\ 1979
'0
0'
"---
,~' )
50-030
!
"
(
(
(
MICROPROCESSOR CLOCKS CONTROL
LOGIC
(-
(,
(
(
(-
('
(~/ ('
('- (
(' (
..
c/
(' (y~
('
(~'
-_/
52-005
-20.48 MHz
-0 ns Tap
PH
0-50 ns
AR
+175 ns Tap
PH
-25 ns Tap
25-75 ns
The MP2 clock is similar to the MP1 clock shown.
The clocks run on either 150- or 2oo-nanosecond
cycles. The length of the cycle depends on the
instruction.
-25 ns Tap
+ Reset
t...
~
"
PH
OR
+100 ns Tap
·.J.I·---
o
25
50
75
100 125
AB021
PH
25
50
75
100
125 150
Fl
ABOll B2F2
a
PH
-125nsTap
125-175 ns
(inst card error)
ABOll
B2F2
~1
~4-
PH
I---
-175 ns Tap
175-225 ns
~4- P - -
p-"6- I - -
I - - .... 6~7- I - -
1-7-I---
1-11- I--'-12- ~
Clk 11 (ROS Cycle Model
elk 12
elk 15 (STO)
(Logic Op)
-50 ns Tap
r-8- +--
t-8- ~
Clk 8 (BU) Initialize
1-11-I--1-12-
+ Set Page Reg elk
A
ABOll
-Single Step or
Start AlU
+--
1-15-I - "'15f0016- I - 1-17
1-18-I - -
A
-Set IC Mode
f0015- I - 1-15- i - -
H7
AB031
-!50 ns Tap
150-200 ns
I
+--
+Reset HI Order ROS AlUl
+Set IC AlUl
PH
(unused)
4-
-50 ns Tap
+ System Reset
A
elk 6 (STO)
Clk 7 (not BU)
Clk 22 (Logic Op)
AB031 B2F2
-Long Cycle
elk 4 (Add) 150-0
(STO Logic Op) 100 ns Tap
(XFR to LSR)
(ADD)
16 (XFR to LSR)
17
18 (unused in ALU1)
19 (ADD)
21 (XFR to LSR)
175
-100 ns Tap
100-150 ns
I
-1
elk 1
elk
elk
elk
elk
elk
a
Long Cycle (200 nsec)----.l'l
AAOll/ ABOll
AAOll/ ABOll
AAOll/ ABOll
AAOll/ ABOll
AAOll/ ABOll
AAOll/ ABOll
AAOll/ ABOll
AAOll/ ABOll
-100-175 ALUl
BU Oper
I-Short Cycle (150 nsecl-...
Tap
Tap
Tap
Tap
Tap
Tap
~
OR
-75 ns Tap
75-125 ns
ADD Oper ALUI
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
-0-75 AlUl
AB021
BOC Oper ALU 1
50
75
100
125
150
175
"-
+125 ns Tap
OR
Clock Timing Chart
+Block
Ie Bypass
-50 ns Tap
50-100 ns
- Short Cycle
Xlr B Bus to IC
OR
o ns Tap
OR
FL
The numbers on the clock outputs (CLK1-CLK22) bear
no relationship to the times these lines become active
within the clock cycle.
Tap
25 ns Tap
C (
MP1 Clock Control Logic
Hardware clocks control both microprocessors (MP1
and MP2). The clocks are stepped by 20.48-MHz
pulses.
o ns
(
(
(
-
1
+5.12 MHz
I:'~~~~_r=:=iABOl
A
PSOI I
+Reset AlUl
+Mach Reset
1-18- I--1-19- P - -
_-_100..
OR
-System Reset
-Set IC AlUl
+ Reset Strobe Mem
-Gate Trap Pulse
AB031
+System Reset
ABO!!
I- 21- I---
I- 22~ I---
(ADD)
i " -I- 22-
+Reset Sense Data
OR
+System Xfr Reset
AB011
52-005
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
OPE~P1
IC CIRCUITS
MICROPROCESSOR 1 INSTRUCTION COUNTER (lC)
MP2 Ie is similar on:
ALD
Cards
AA071, 081, 091
A2L2, A2M2
-Branch Set IC
-100 ns Tap
OR
-100 ns Tap
-IC Overflow
A
-50 ns Tap
FL
-Initialize LSR
A
-Xfr B Bus to IC Reset
,
-System Reset
IC 9-15
...
8
-
..... A
r'\.
Ie 10 15
..
.....
IC 11-15
...
-
r'\.
IC 12-15
ABOll
-
A
IC 8-15
B2
E2
AB091
100...
(8)
(8)
-Step IC 8-15
N
b-.../
b-/
-B Bus 0-7
......
-Gate B Bus to IC
......
..... 10-
-ROS Reg 8-15
Branch Set IC
FL
-ROS Reg 8-15
A
........ A
FL
.....
62 E2
(8)
~
IC 13 15
....
A
+Block Ie Bypass
B2 E2
AB091
-BU or BOC
.-
IC 14-15
.
-
~
..
IC 15
........ A
FL
....
4
4v
+Clk 6
~
A
+ ROS Reg 5 or Set Ie 1
+ROS Reg 6 or Set IC 2
FL
FL
.....
...J A
2
•
~
....
....... A
FL
~
+Clk 8
...... 1A
rEf
-Page Bit 4
-Page Bit 5
FL
To ROS
50-003
-Page Bit 6
.....
+ROS Reg 7 or Set IC 3
15
-
~ A
•
14
-
AB195
•
b....../
•••...1 A
E2
A
8
....
-ROS Reg 4
FL
FL
(8)
+Reset Hi 0 rder ROS
13
....... A
OR
-BOC Met
12
......1A
To ROS
50-003
AB091
b-./
r'\.
+Inst Count 8-15
OR
b-/
11
-IC Trigger 8-15
A
FL
....
AB10i
FF
A
10
..... A
"'"
.....
FL
9
....... A
~
Clk 11
"'"
FL
-Page Bit 7
--BOC Oper
B2E2
~./
_. Branch Set IC
- Bump Cond Met
AB081
I
....
......
A
Bump to 4
FL
PC
AB071
I
© COpyright Intemation8l BuSiness Machines Corporation 1916. 1979
~ 0t"""\,
~j\..j0
0 O'. . .0".
I
o o ()
52~010
(~
(~
(
(
c~
OPER-LSR BUFFERS
LOCAL STORAGE REGISTERS
STAT REGISTERS
The Local Storage Registers (LSRs) serve as buffers to
hold command codes, addresses, error conditions, and
any other data the microprocessors use. Each
microprocessor has 32 Local Storage Registers. Each
register holds one byte (8 bits) of data and a parity bit:
The registers are numbered LSR 0 through LSR 31.
STAT registers are used for microprocessor to
microprocessor communication and for microprocessor
to data flow communication.
MP1 Stat Register Usage
MP2 Stat Register Usage
MPl
Stat
Data from the 0 Register is stored in the LSRs, and the
output from the LSRs goes to the A Register and the B
Bus.
Microprogram instructions gate the contents of the
LSRs to other registers.
When the LSRs are used, Field 1 of the microprogram
instruction addresses a specific register.
The procedure on page 12-012 displays contents of
local storage regisJers.
c c c\ c c c c C
52-015
MP2
Stat
0
Stop
Tape Op
0
1
Sense
1
Start R/W
2
Sense II
2
WrlD
3
Diag. Mode
3
7 Trk
4
Stat A
4
Stat A
5
Stat B
5
Stat B
6
Stat C
6
Stat C
7
Stat D
7
Stat D
. ROS/LSR Logic
ROS
Reg.
0
1
2
3
LSR
Adr
Decode
4
5
6
7
MP1/MP2 Stat Registers
I~
...
- B Bus (0-7)
The MPl and MP2 Stat Regis ters
are identical except for the
gating lines.
o Bus
LSR Out Bit (0-7)
FL
(9)
(MPL) + XFR LSR 1 To Stat
To:
A
Clock 158
A Register
B Bus
I
(MP2) + XFR LSR 2 To Stat
PC
~
r-B
,....
,....
A
~.
Stat (0-7)
FL
(8)
/
...
MPl
MP2
+Reset Stat REG (A, B, C, or D)
ALD
Card
ALD
LSRs
AB231
B2C2
AA221
A2N2
LSR
Decode
AB201
B2D2
AA191
A2N2
Address
Decode
AB071
B2D2
AA071
A2N2
Parity
Check
Card
'"
r..b
A
~
MP1
ALD
AB411
AB361
B2C2
AA351
Card
A2T2
MP2
ALO
AA401
Card
A2Q2
A2N2
3103-2/3420
845958
1 Sep 79
©
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
52-015
OPER--XOUTA/XOUTB
CROSSOVER (XOUTA/XOUTB)
REGISTERS
The MP1 XOUTA Crossover Register is both a
buffer for MP1 control information and a transfer
register when sending a byte of information to
MP2.
The individual bits from XOUTA (XOUT A BIT x)
are used for the following:
Location
Bit
o
Function
FC2ll
Gates unit serial number to Channel.
FC2ll
BW3ll
BW15l
Gates EC level and features data to channel
Gates 7-track Mode Sets
Generates WRITE END GATE TO OF
2
BN3ll
Gates 7-track Mode Sets
3
BN3ll
BW15l
Gates 7-track Mode Sets
Gates Write Tape Mark
BN311
CN03l
BW15l
Gates 7-track Mode Sets
Gates NRZI Track-in-Error
Gates WRITE MARK 1
CN03l
BW15l
BN231
Gates NRZI Track-in-Error
Gates WRITE MARK 2
Gates WRITE OP TO OF
6
PR16l
CN03l
BW15l
Gates the Sense Bytes to Channel
Gates NRZI Track-in-Error
Gates WRITE A2
7
PR16l
CN031
BW151
Gates Sense Bytes to Channel
Gates NRZI Track-in-Error
Gates WRITE A 1
4
5
The contents of XOUTA are gated to MP2 by XFR
XINA TO LSR 2 on AA431. Output of XOUTA in
MP1 is called XINA in MP2.
MP1 XOUTB crossover register is a transfer
register sending a byte of information to MP2.
When MP1 XOUTB is used. MP2 traps to address
000. The contents of XOUT A becomes an index
to a specific routine in MP2.
The MP2 XOUTA crossover register is both a
buffer for MP2 control information and a transfer
register when sending a byte of information to
MP1.
52-025
Bits from XOUTA (XOUTA BIT x) are used as
follows:
Bit
ALD
Function
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BW231
AA141
AA141
CC021
BW231
CB111
AA141
CBll1
Gates PE Mode
Gates forward operation
Allows envelope loss
Gates Sync Mode for Detection
Gates 6250 Mode
Gates Detection Frequency
Gates low gain to read logic
Gates detection frequency
MP1 XOUTA Register Bit Usage
MP1
XOUTA
Sense Stat
On
0
The contents of XOUTA are gated to MP1 by XFR
XINA TO LSR 1 on AB441. Output of XOUTA in
MP2 is known as XINA in MP1.
The MP2 XOUTB Crossover Register is a transfer
register sending a byte of information to MP1.
This register is primarily used to send sense bytes
from MP2 to MP1 for transfer to channel.
'-.J
(~.
\ . ./
0
'-..j
0 0 0 0
Format
Format
End Gate
End Gate
End Gate
2
7-track Mode
Set*
3
7-track Mode
Set*
Tape Mark
Tape Mark
4
7-track Mode
Set*
00111
00111
5
Write#
11100
11100
NRZI Write
XFR TIE
Any binary combination
over 8 will Dead Track only
track O.
P 0
1 2
3 4
5 6
7
1
1 1 1
6
Bin 2
PE
01010
1 1
7
Bin 1
NRZI
10101
1
Real Time
gating of
Sense Bytes
1
1 1
1
1
1
* Bits 1-4 of
7-track Mode
Set.
# Bits are phase
locked in
dataflow
hardware by rise
of TAPE OP to
allow use of
register for write
format.
Strobed' into
write controls at
each group
boundary except
bit 3 which is
real time.
Microprogram encoded.
Crossover Register
MP2 XOUTA Bit Usage
-B Bus (P, 0-7)
MP2
XOUTA
A
Crossover registers
are identical except
for the gating lines
FL
-XOUTA Bit (P, 0-7)
+XFR LSRl to XOUTA
0
\.J
() 0
~.
(')
\..y
1"'\
I\.~
MPl
'A2T2
AB391
MP2
A2Q2
AA381
I~
~'
"
Data Control
P
(9)
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
-'~j
Format
1
+XFR XOUTB (To Trap MP2)
r
1600 BPI Write
7-track Mode
Set*
+XFR LSR2 to XOUTB
.~
6250 BPI Write
P
+XFR LSR to XOUTA
©
Dataflow
Control
".
0
PE
1
Forward
2
Allow Env. Loss
3
Sync
4
6250
5
Speed
6
Low Gain
7
Speed
./'1
./
"
/
r·'~
.
'",j
52-025
...... '>.
1
\,~/
r'
~/
".
6-,
(
'~'
C'-'\
,',
(
L./
( -,
j
c c c
c
('
52-030
OPER-MP INFORMATION
MICROPROCESSOR LISTINGS
Microprocessors 1 and 2 have different listings that
can be identified by ALU 1 or ALU2 printed in the
upper left corner of each page.
MP 1 has six link registers named LINK 1 through
L1NK6 and MP2 has three LINK registers named
LINK 1 through L1NK3. The LINK registers are local
storage registers used for linkage purposes. The
specific local storage registers used for linkage are:
Listings are in four parts:
LINK
MP1
MP2
1.
LINK 1
L1NK2
L1NK3
L1NK4
L1NK5
L1NK6
LSR16
LSR17
LSR18
LSR19
LSR24
LSR25
LSR28
LSR25
LSR26
2.
General reference information, sense byte
descriptions, Local Storage Register layout, branch
condition codes, transfer codes, etc.
Equate statements which specify a symbolic name
for a value. Equate statements are generally
followed by a description of the use of the
constant.
3.
Listing of the executable instructions.
4.
Cross reference table containing all symbolic
names used in the listing. This table includes the
length of the referenced field, its value, the
statement number in which it is defined, and the
statement number of all instructions using the
symbolic name.
COMMUNICATION BETWEEN
MICROPROCESSORS
Either microprocessor can move a byte of information
from an LSR to either the XOUT A or XOUTB registers.
The other microprocessor can then move the byte of
information from the XOUTA or XOUTB register to an
LSR.
Each microprocessor can test, with Branch On
Condition instructions, STAT BITS B, C, and 0 from
the other microprocessor.
LINKING MICROPROGRAM ROUTINES
LINK registers store microprogram addresses for return
to a major routine from subroutines. Before branching
to a subroutine, the address of a Branch Unconditional
instruction is stored in a LINK register. The Branch
Unconditional instruction must be in the same page as
the subroutine to which the program is branching.
When the subroutine has completed its function, the
contents of the LINK register are transferred to the
Instruction Counter. The microprogram then branches
to the Branch Unconditional instruction, which, in turn,
branches to the return point in the calling routine.
C'
Multiple link registers are available because there may
be several possible branches out of a subroutine.
MICROPROCESSOR (MP 1 AND MP2)
FUNCTIONS
Two microprocessors (50-003) control logic
operations of the tape control.
Operation of MP2 is dependent on the operation of
MP 1. MP2 remains idle until MP 1 supplies it with an
address at which to begin. MP1 operates constantly,
either executing a routine required by the operation
being performed or polling the possible conditions that
can require the execution of a routine.
In general, MP 1 handles all logic operations dealing
with the channel and MP2 handles the operations
dealing with the tape units.
The microprocessors can transfer bytes of information
between them and test single bits stored in the other
microprocessor.
MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTIONS
The microprocessors use 12 instructions. See
following pages.
MICROPROGRAM EC's
Microprogram EC's are applied with two Array Patch
Cards, type OED 1, which provide auxiliary ROS arrays.
The arrays contain four sets of microcode patches
(ALU 1 and 2 for 3803-1 and 2). Plug each card as
shown in Figure 1 in order to select the proper
patches for it's location. The following patches are
active when these two cards are installed (refer to
page 52-102 for the patch listings):
1.
Alternate Path Device Busy
2.
Velocity Retry Extension
MICROPROCESSOR INSTRUCTION
FORMAT
3.
Turnaround Delay
4.
Allocated Busy
Microprocessor instructions have the following format:
5.
Truncated Postamble
6.
Extra Device End
7.
Sense Reset
[label]OPCODE field1,field2[comments]
where label is a one- to eight-character name by
which the instruction can be referenced. Branch
instructions point to locations in the microprogram by
label.
OPCODE is the operation to be performed on the
data or addresses in Field 1 or Field 2.
Verify factory plugging:
Card locations = B2J2
A2G2
, Field 1 is generally the address of a Local Storage
Register. In some instructions this field may be a
branch condition or ROS page number.
o
0
17
0
000
15
8
6
Microprocessors consist of:
Read Only Storage (ROS) in which the
microprogram is stored for use by the
microprocessor. The contents of ROS cannot be
modified by the microprogram.
An Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) which performs all
arithmetic and logic operations: ADD, AND, OR,
and XOR.
Registers and Buses to hold or transfer data for
subsequent use.
Read Only Storage is addressed by three-digit
hexidecimal numbers 000 through 7FF. Each
addressable unit in the Read Only Storage is 16 bits
long. The first digit of the address specifies a page
(block of 256 addresses) of Read Only Storage. Each
microprocessor has 8 pages of storage, 0 through 7.
The two low-order digits specify one of the possible
256 addresses in a page.
Field 2 is generally a constant, referred to as a
decimal number or by a symbolic name. The value of
symbolic constants for each microprocessor is listed in
the beginning of the listings as EQU statements. In
some instructions this field may be a branch address
or transfer code.
Field 2 can contain several symbolic constants
combined arithmetically, that is, the sum or difference
of two or more constants.
("2-high" card)
Note: If RPQ 510231 is installed see plugging instructions on
pages 52-103/104.
17
16
15
8
7
-
r
For example, the constant in the instruction:
6
-
ADD WORK 1 ,ONES-174
Plug if
location B2J2
(ALU 1)
0
results in the constant hexidecimal FF (ONES) minus
the decimal value 174, or a decimal value of 81.
Plugged
for 3803
Model 2
0
,
_...1
0
0
0
,
0
L
Plug if
location A2G2
(ALU 2)
FIGURE 1
52-030
OPER~P
REGISTERS
52-035
HIGH-ORDER ROS REGISTER
....
B Bus (0-7) ALU 1 (or 2)
The High-Order ROS Register in each microprocessor
holds the 8 high-order bits of a microprogram
instruction. The registers in MP1 and MP2 are identical.
Bits 0 through 3 contain the operation code. Bits 3
through 7 contain a branch condition or LSR address.
Bits 4 through 7 and the Hi/Lo latch can also contain
the LSR address.
A
......
A Register
LSR Out Bit 0 ALUl (or 2)
-Xfr LSR to A Register
......
Bit 3 will be zero for OR, AND, ADD, XO, and STO
instructions. In these instructions, bit 3=0 allows the
addressed LSR to be updated.
A
FL
(8)
Bit 3 in this register serves different purposes,
depending on the instruction being executed. Bit 3 is
part of the operation code for the modified instructions
ORM, ADDM, ANDM, and XOM. This use prevents
updating the LSR by blocking. the gate to the lSR, ClK
ROS Reg (8-15)
....
+Clock 4 ALUl (or 2)
A
~
,..A
Bit 3 is part of the branch condition code for the BOC
instruction. There are 32 branch condition codes used.
MP1
LOW-ORDER ROS REGISTER
or (8 - 15 )
+ ROS B It (07)
MP2
ALD
Card
ALD
Card
AB301
B2C2
AA291
A2 N2
ROS Reg
I'..
.
N
A
........
I'..
-
A REGISTER
The A Register serves as a buffer for information from
an LSR that is used as input to the AlU. The contents
of the selected LSR are gated to the A Register by XFR
LSR TO A REGISTER. The next logic operation (ADD,
AND, OR, or XOR) ORs the contents of the A Register
with the contents of the instruction's Field 2 and places
the result on the A Bus.
MPl
A Bus (0-7) ALU 1
MP2
A Bus (0-7)
Mask
15.
The Low-Order ROS register in each microprocessor
holds the 8 low-order bits of a microprogram
instruction. The registers in MP1 and MP2 are identical.
The output from these registers goes to the A Bus, the
transfer decode circuits, or the Instruction Counter,
depending on the instruction.
OR
FL
(8)
(0-7)
ROS Reg (0-7) or (8-15) ALUl (or 2)
OR
FL
(8)
(8-15)
+ Clk 1 not CE Cycle Mode L2
......
During logic operations, the A Register is reset by the
eLK 4 line.
MP1
MP2
ALD
Card
ALD
Card
Order
AB051
B202
AA06
A2M2
Low
Order
AB061
B2E2
AA05
A2L2
A
~ High
,..l:::.
3803-2/3420
o
52-035
C)
,
""
.
i/
\
(
I'~-)
/'
'"
'--...
/
/.
""\
c c
(
(
(-
c
(-
c; C
c' () c
52-040
OPER-CHANNEL TAGS
CHANNEL TAGS IN REGISTER
CHANNEL BUS IN REGISTER
The Channel Tags in register holds the channel tags
bits until they are transferred to the Channel Bus In.
Individual register bits are used as follows:
The Channel Bus In register serves as a buffer to
transfer bytes from LSRs in MP1 to channel.
-8 !Jus (0-7) ALU1
h
r--'
-
--
N ~
"'-
J
-B Bus (0-7) ALU1
-
h""
FL
+CTI Bit (0-7)
(8)
(To Channel)
Chain Hold A
Chain Hold B
Hold Interface or Busy
CU Busy
Service In
Status In
CTI Bit 5 to CE
Address In
CTI Bit 6 to CI;
'bp In
3
4
5
6
7
N
"'-
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
CBI Bit (0-7)
OR
FLs
(To Channel)
f'.,.,
A
A
~
~
~
FC161
A2R2
1
2
,
t'-.....
8
+Xfr LSR to Channel Bus In
~
0
A
!""'"-
L-
+Xfr LSR1 to Channel Tags
Function
f'.,.,
A
h
+Reset CTI Reg A
Bit
C~
FC171
A2R2
+Combined Bus Data (0-7)
52-040
C'
{
"
OPER-TUBO REGISTER
52-045
TAPE UNIT BUS OUT (TUBO) REGISTER
The TUBO register is a buffer to hold control
information. High speed output is ORed with data bus
bits.
The TUBO register stores MP2 control information for
the 3420. The output information is multiplexed with
tag lines (MOVE, CONTROL, COMMAND) to control
tape unit functions.
-Bus 0-7 ALU2
-I'-,.
...-.--
N
A
~
f'......
-
8
OR
FLs
TUBO Bits 0-7
(8)
TUBO Bits 0-7
A2R2
FD021
~C091 - Devi ce Interface Primary
SC101 - Device I nterface Secondary
PROS1 - CE Sel Reg
To:
+Xfr LSR2 to TUBO
r-......
A
~
.------t:::.
FD021
A2R2
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
/'
(
."""
-
(_."'"
~
\. yJ
Channel
Data
9 Bits !tracks)
End of data (EOD) is signaled by a unique
subgroup of five bytes immediately preceding the
residual group.
8 Character
1
+
I
Following the residual group, a 8-byte cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) is encoded into a ten bit
group. This group, with the auxiliary check
character, ensures the integrity of the read and
write operation, including verifying any error
corrections that may have taken place.
4 Characters
r
1
Subgroup
Subgroup
I
I
A
B
1
1
-
Figure 1c.
-
-
5 Bit character
(See Figure 3b
...........~I on 55-010)
Data to be written by the 6250 bpi feature is
continuously collected in seven character groups (9
bits in each character) and is held in the control
unit 6250 bpi feature circuitry. (see 50-000 through
50-002 for second level logic details.) An error
correction character is generated and then added
to the seven characters to make an eight character
data group. This data group is then divided into two
subgroups of four characters each. The four bits in
each of the 9 tracks are encoded into five bits.
(see Figure 1a through 1e.) This matrix of bits,
9x10, is recorded on the tape (see Figure 3a on
55-010).
-
-
-
5 Bits
1
I
-
-
_.1
-
-
I
_I
5 Bits
10 Bit Encoded Data Group
...
9 Track Bytes
of an encoded
subgroup
J
Subgroup A
Figure 1e.
Encoded
Data
Group
Bytes
Figure 1d.
Translator
(encoderl
9x10
Bit
Matrix
9 Track
Exactly
Equals
1 I
I
Interleaved into the recorded block, every 158
storage groups, is a resync burst. This burst
allows the tape control to put into full operation
any track(s) that have lost synchronization or were
dead tracked due to tape defects. The action limits
dead tracking for greater throughput.
4 Bits
r-------
#1
Subgroup B
I
Note: There are 1106 bytes of channel input data in
each 1580 (6250 bpj) group recorded data block written
on tape.
Encoded
Data
Group
#158
.J
'+'
1580 Encoded Group Recorded Data Block Written on Tape
ff
55-008
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
n
0
0
()
0 0 ()
f"'~
0
(C~
\..j
0
('"'1
~y!
/'l
"---./
-.,
"
/
f
,c
"-
.-
•
II:
20
.....
1.1
1.1
c:
>-
•
II:
1580
c:
d
20
1580
19
0
20
1580
1
I
g
>-
III
II:
20
Legend
Remaining
data charac-
Control Subgroup
Error
Tl ~:~lfhDft~'O" II
..• ~.....
1.1
c:
>-
.
19
II:
0
1580
20
l:Restores track where
synchronization is lost
T
~
.
;
II:
:I
lit
d
I
I
I
Remaining data
less than 1106
da ta b ytes In
multiple of 7
(851
.......
~
~
c:
w
850
Control
Subgroup
5
m
::J
..
('oj
:2
()
at
II:
II:
()
10
10
~ (See Notel
J
.......
~
5
I
C1
~
•
:E
E
~
a.
~
~
Synchronizes reed
detection in backward
mode
For all bits {tracks 1 through 91
I
I
Name
Pattern
D
Term
1 0101
B
Second 1
01 1 1 1
II
Sync
11111
a
Mark 1
00111
Mark 2
11100
II
Second 2
1 1 110
fJ
Data
DODD DDDE or GGGG GGGG
Residual
XXXX XXXE or HHHH HHNE
E
E
\
.E
~
80
..
-.-
Resync Burst Between Data Bursts
.J
oF
II II II II II II
r
oF
~ Resync ----I...~I
Preamble and First Data Group
..
rr
.,.,
.J.,
14 Subgroups
....--aIl1·s
:
I
,
BCCCCCXE
CRC
~~.
II fJ
r,,-
I
'"
"""J
II
fJ
II
II
Burst
Comments
Kev
(See 55-010 Legend 2 for data symbols.)
.,
.....- - - - - 1 6 Subgroups------i~
Postamble and End Data
Data Residual and CRC
Note: From first data bytes through residual bytes
(9042 fci) equals 6250 bpi of customer data.
oF
fJ
.,r
.,
r
.,I"
II II
II
,
Subgroup ~_ _ _....
IBG
II
II II
0.3 inch (7.6 mml
,.
J
~14 Subgroups all 1'5
I
I
.,
~
r - - 1 6 Subgroup Postamble --------...,.-..-i
55-009
BASIC RECORDING TECHNIQUES (Cont'd)
55-010'
GROUP CODED RECORDING 6250 BPI
(Cant'd)
6250 bpi does not relate to actual writing density on
tape, but to effective data density. Actual density (9042
bpi) is greater due to the formatting and encoding.
This formatting and encoding is transparent to the user.
The formatting and encoding method allows reliable
error correction for any two tracks simultaneously in
error. Also, tracks are not immediately dequeued or
dead tracks assigned When an error occurs as they
were in the past. It is conceivable that a block could
have errors in all nine tracks and appear to the user to
be read error free as long as only two tracks have
errors at any given instant.
Figure 3b. How 4 Bit (Address) Becomes 5 Data
Bits
Figure 3a. Encoded Data Group
DATA GROUP
Subgroup
Physical
Tracks
I
Subgroup
A
B
A
B
DODD
DODD
GGGGG
GGGGG
2
DODD
DODD
GGGGG
GGGGG
3
DODD
DODD
GGGGG
GGGGG
4
DODD
DODD
GGGGG
GGGGG
5
DODD
DDDD
GGGGG
GGGGG
6
DDDD
DDDD
GGGGG
GGGGG
7
DDDD
DODD
GGGGG
GGGGG
8
DDDD
DDDD
GGGGG
GGGGG
9
A1H2 Card
r---------------------------------------------~
STORAGE GROUP
DDDD
DODD
GGGGG
GGGGG
1234
5678
12345
678910
I
I
I
II
4 to 5 Encoder (ROS)
-=::..-_-_-- - - - _ _ _
----__
I
0
0
0
E
D
R
I
I
I
I
I
Track 4
I
:
Subgroup B (Addr) _.J
II
I
RDS Encoder
Subgroup A (Addr) _..J
I
I
Serializer for
track 4
I
I
I
L- - - - - -
Group
Positions
To Tape Unit
Write Circuits
I
D
Track 4
---
:I
Write
Trigger
DiGGGG~GGGGG)
__ - - - - - - - , - - - - - - - -
--=:.
5 to 1
Serializer
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _________________ JI
Note: This illustration is only one of nine such circuits.
(See 50-001 for further details.)
Legend 2. Data Symbols
Data Represented
Symbol
B
CRC or Pad Characters
C
Cyclic Redundancy Check Characters
D
Channel Data Characters
E
ECC Characters
G
Encoded Group Recorded Bits
L
Last Character
N
Auxiliary CRC
X
Residual Character
55-010
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979, 19B3
,,('~
",.,jJ
o
0000
,,r'-
>;/
\.
.,
y
/" '" ",
,.
/
/-'"
\.,
"'-
".
.i'
.'<.....
o
("'I
"0
o
t)
",-,'
o
r,\
,,-)
(),'
\..,
c
(
(--
(
("
f'
,.
~-_/-'
(~:
(:'
<,:
C'
'
/'
('
(:
./
('
(~
(-\ (: ('
j
(~
/
(/
COMMON START I/O (SIO) ROUTINE
<=
C·\
'.
55-020
This section introduces the microprogram controls used
to read and write a record from load point. Addresses
noted within the charts are key checkpoint addresses
which perform a major function.
These charts provide major syncronization points within
a routine, and layout a path to check the path through
the microcode. The common Start I/O routine is
followed by the write operation, then the read
operation from load point. The paths shown are for
single, unchained operations with no exceptional
conditions.
ALU2
ALUl
095
Initiate start 1/0
operation. Fetch unit
address.
Using the compare ROS stop sync on ROS address of
the CE panel (see sequence 10 on page 12-011).
synchronization can be developed at various points
within the operation being performed.
000
_ ' _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ \ALU2heldreset.
Remember that many routines are commonly used
many times and will provide unstable synchronization
points.
Some knowledge of basic microprogram concepts is
assumed. XOUTA and XOUTB regis'ters as well as the
status registers A, B, C, and 0 provide response back
and forth between the ALUs. ALU1 basically controls
the processing unit channel, while ALU2 controls the
device interface. Both ALUs control various portions of
the data flow.
ALU2 status routine.
ALU2 is a slave to ALU1, and is controlled by a
transfer command and XOUTB branch index byte being
passed from ALU1 to ALU2. Response from ALU2 is
by way of ALU2 status registers.
© Copyright International Business Machines CorporatIon 1976,
Index
X'EB'
-------------~
Check chaining and
NRZI flags. Branch to
test interface A or B.
If busy and the tach
is active, set device end
prime bit on.
001
2El
Set XOUTAIM LSA
to 6250 Flag if 6250 was
the last mode set.
Clear tape un it bus
out (TUBO) and fetch
tape unit sense byte O.
Select and TUBO X'Ol'.
55-020
e·<
-,
COMMON START I/O (SIO) ROUTINE (Cont'd)
55-022
ALUl
ALU2
100
101
Fetch Operation code
and decode the command.
Store ALU2 branch
index byte in XOUTB.
Send TU sense byte 0
to XOUTB. Send TU
sense byte 1 to XOUTA.
j
llF Rewind
116 REW/Unload
110 Write
121 ERG
125 OSE
12AWTM
12F BSR
133 BSF
135 FSR
137 FSF
143 Read
Forward
146 Read
Backward
186 Sense
40B
X '2F'
X '29'
X'13'
X '22'
X '31'
X '20'
X '3E'
X '3C'
X '37'
X '35'
103
Branch if TU is busy
(rew, run, DSEI.
105
Send model number to
the A·register and
XOUTA.
X '33'
X '3A'
X '06'
10E
r-'--- -l
Branchto Openers.
ALU2 will set Status 0
when completed with
its status routine.
Branch on Status B, C,
or O.
Test device end prime.
I
112/117
I
I
Test pulsed interrupt,
and Ready to Not
Ready.
I
J
rt~S~~!!!. _.J
Fetch TU sense byte D.
Return by linking to
register 4.
r
I
If start is on in drive,
set status D and trap
to 000.
14- ---r-'-~-
____ 1 ____
Write: 4D2 Branch to 220
I
(See 55-024)
I Read: 4D3I
Branch to 22C
I
(See 55-024)
~
lEA
r
1
____ L ___ ,
Wait for ALU1.
I
,
I
Status D ~ normal
I
Status B + D ~ TU busy
I
Status C + D ~, Not
I
I
Ready
I
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...1
I
I
I
________ ..J
55-022
'" "i)J
~
"'../
r'\
"'-/
(l
"'-.j
~
'~
0
(""'\
,,-J
C) 0 0 0
0
~
,").
'''-.
.(~"'Il-"
,
)
/
.~
"-
/
"
\
"
,
./~
>,
".
~
7'
"'-~
C)
("~,
.
/
()
(
(~
(
(~
(
(
(
(/ (
(
(
C'
BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
Write from load point is performed by controlling drive
motion and controls with ALU2. ALU2 also sets the
data flow control to write the single 1 or P track
identification (lD) at load point.
ALU1 initiates the first data Service~ln cycle, then
relinquishes data transfer to the hardware. ALU1 also
controls the write triggers for all control characters
within the preamble, postamble, and resync burst.
(~;
C
('
(~
(~
C C
(""
./
(~/
(=
C
(~
C (
,J
55-024
13. ALU 1 checks for an all ones character indicating
the end of data. This allows for writing of the
residual and eRe frames.
14. ALU1 then writes the postamble consisting of the
following characters: 11100, seventy 1s. 11110,
10101.
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALU2
ALUl
220
Test A LU2 Status C for
15. ALU2 waits for I BG. then tests for errors. ALU2
finishes by setting Status D and trapping to 000.
Once the data portion of the write command is entered,
ALU2 monitors velocity during the tach period
transitions to test for velocity change during write.
The write operation is divided into the following steps:
1.
Trigger ALU2 to issue a sense reset to the drive.
ALU1 will monitor ALU2 Status D, which indicates
that ALU2 is finished with sense reset.
2.
Fetch TU sense bytes 0 and 1 and test for drive
status .
. 3.
Raise Service In for one byte of data before
turning control of the channel over to the data flow
section.
4.
ALU1 again allows ALU2 to perform the write
operation.
5.
Set Erase in the drive (not Write Status yet) and
erase backward, then forward. (Backward 150
tachs. forward 140 tachs.)
6.
Test for Tach Start fail or Velocity Error. then write
1-track ID burst.
7.
Write self-adjusting gain control (SAGe) burst with
the inverse Tape Mark (no zone 1) attached to the
end.
8.
Set SAGe circuits in the drive to perform read back
check.
9.
Write record preamble consisting of the following
characters: 10101. 01111. seventy 1s. 00111 .
10. The hardware data flow section now takes over the
writing of data while ALU2 monitors the capstan
tach velocity in the drive.
11. Every 1106 channel bytes (158 storage groups on
tape). ALU1 intersperses a resync burst consisting
of: 00 111. 11111. 11111. 111 00.
ALU2 sense reset
routine.
058
Set ALUl Status D to
indicate sense reset.
Trigger ALU2 to do a
sense reset to the drive.
I ndex
~
----,
X'OE'
ODE
I
I
Bring in clear flag
byte and branch to
sense reset routine.
lAg
I
Send device select,
command tag, and reset
(X'02') to the drive.
lAE
r
Branch on Status D to
bypass ALU error reset.
12. When data is complete. the hardware writes an all
ones character.
55..024
BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
55-026
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALU1
ALU2
ALU1
ALU2
180
07D
Trigger ALU2 to begin
Clear error registers.
-,
Index = X'13'.
I
1CC
Drop drive tags.
013
Turn on tracer and
store write command
in Work 4.
012
5A3
Drop Status In. Reset
Status D. Branch to
write routi ne.
r:-----
I Wait for
ALU 1.
----,
I
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ .J
Test for LWR (loop
write read) at load
point (LPl.
----,
Loop while ALU2
completes backward and
forward erase. Monitor
HID or error condition.
Service Out checked.
Reset word count to zero
in sense.
Test positioning bit
in the drive. Active
indicates drive is still
moving.
I
I
I
741
60C
Entry point for normal
write. Fetch TU sense
byte 0 and store in
XINB.
Set controls to make
erase, select, move,
and control tag available to the drive.
530
Set tags and TUBO.
Set move and erase
status.
535
Fetch drive response.
Test Control Status
Reject.
© Copyright International Business Machines
Corporation 1976,
/
-~
55-026
-",",\,
(
(C
(
~-
(
(
(
(
f
f
(
(~
f
(
(
(
C
(
(
(
(
(-
~
(
(
(
f
(-
f
(
(/ {
BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
(
( (
(
55-028
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALUl
rAuil~ii~Ping
I until ALU2 sets
I Status B.
ALU2
ALU2
ALUl
- --1
JALU1~iiI;;;~n-;
I until ALU2 sets
I Status B.
I
I
L _________ ....J
I
- - -,
L. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
..J
Wait for read time,
then start count and
raise Move tag to the
drive.
78C
Count down check - set
no tach error if 256
counts were received
without seeing tach
pulse.
Drop move and store
write command in
Work 4.
---,
I
I
I
I
I
Fetch mode set from
XINA. Test if 6250
feature is present.
753
Store write command
(X'08') in Work 4.
(Sets forward in TU.)
768
Raise Command tag
and place Work 4 on
TUBO.
770
Fetch drive response.
Test Command Status
Reject.
cD
Copyright International Busmess Machin'es Corporation 1976, 1979
Fetch drive rasponse.
Test Command Status
Reject.
55-028
. BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
. '
55-030
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALU1
ALU2
ALU1
18B
631
•Status B active. E;rese
backward and forward
complete. Prepare for
ALU2 to write 1-track
~--------
---------
rAw;
Set 6250 in XOUTA.
Set tape Op to data
flow. Set Status B.
looping u~ -
completes ID
I ALU2
burst.
ALU2
20F
Store maximum
velocity count =' ones
minus (-I 24.
""1
I
L _ _ _ _ -.l
10.
634
Test LWR.
J
I~
638
Loop until ALU2
Status B drops
indicating 10 burst
complete.
--
-,
I
I
I
I ____
L
.JI
... -----1
Four count exhausted. .
Set CNTRDY, set
count = 4.
Wait for read time then
begin testing for tach
pulses.
1
I
I
_~~~_...J
348
... -----,
Count four more tach
periods, clocking
between transitions.
Count 4
'I
I
I
_..J
Gap control active.
TUBO and reset command
tag.
20F
Fetch TU sense byte 1.
(Still in 1600 mode.)
6DO
Set write burst status.
Set ALU2 Status B
(still anI.
© Copyright International Business·Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
o
f-"I
,
\~
o
~\
().
"-.
C)
/---
'\-
o
55-030
.~
,
/~
.
~
'"
(
(
(
(
c:
"•.
/
55-032
BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALUl
ALU2
ALUl
ALU2
604
ALUl looping until
ALU2 completes 10
burst.
Load counter and write
ID burst for 2 in. (56,8 mm)
without checking.
ALUl looping until
ALU2 is ready to write
SAGe burst.
641
Branch to DOITFORA.
Gate format to XOUTA.
Wait for rise of Clock B.
Store count in WOR Kl
to write 2 in. (56,8 mmJ
burst.
I
~
_ _ .-J
Set for 256 tachs. Set
PERMRDWT (write
condition) and ALU2
Status B.
7A9
Test for beginning of
record (BOR) and
continue countdown.
643
Branch to DOITFORB.
Gate format to XOUTA.
Wait for fall of Clock B.
7AB
---1
645
BOR detected. Reset
LP mark flag to indicate
BOR.
I
I
count is done.
Countdown. Store in
Workl to write 2 in.
(56,8 mm) more while
testing one track.
639
Status B dropped. Set
counter for SAGC burst
and FORMA Ttl to
XOUTA (onesJ.
630
~--------
I
649
SAGC burst written,
set inverse Tape Mark
(TM) format = SAGC1.
------655
.-----,
Loop until ALU2 sets
Status B to begin write
of SAGC.
___ J
I
I
I
Prepare to send Set
Density, Erase, and
Device Select commands
to TU.
Inverse Tape Mark
complete. Signal STOP
to ROS2. Drop write
condition.
658
......--
Loop until Status B
drops indicating that
the IBG is detected.
L
---,
-,
I
I
____ ---1I
Load 101 more tach
counts and continue
countdown.
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
r------t.--....,I
I
L
I
~St~.J
3803-2/3420
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
55-032
BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
55-034
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALU2
ALUl
ALU1
ALU2
nc
156
f'AW"1 i:"oPing :;;-;iIALu211
I senses IBG and resets
I Status B.
Set 6250 in XOUTAIM.
I
L _ _ _ _ ---1
-,
I
I
~~B~_J
r---'"
I
I
I
I
650
731
Status B dropped. Loop
until Status B is set and
ALU2 indicates Ready
for record.
IBG. Reset Status Band
PERMRDWT (write
condition ).
4------------
17A
Write status and not
read forward. Skip
delay.
L ____ l
65F
Write formatting, not at
Load Point.
..... - - - - - - - - - - - -
Set ALU2 Status B.
Set tape operation to
data flow.
663
6eD
....-. DIOTFORA
--,
Set to write a frame.
Loop here until clock B
is active.
I
I
I
L _ _ _ _ .JI
3803-2/3420
CO Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976,
55-034
(-.
(-
(
(
(/
(
c'
(~
BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
55-036
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALU2
ALU2
ALUl
61C
r ALUl tc;"opin~ntii writ;--'
I condition
L
rises,
-----
Load block recognition
time-out count for no
BOR or early begin.
I
- - - - ...J
6CC
A-Frame written.
Return for more
preamble.
Maximum count to 24.
Set count for this model
to test speed.
30B
Set initial 4 count.
Clock through 4 tachs
without checking.
Test speed for 4 tach
periods. but not during
Write data.
-- -- -- --
668
Store A2 ORed with
Mark 1 character.
(Format 01 + 8 01111)
-4--6C8
332
-+- - - - - - - -
Write B·Frame.
Return when clock B
drops.
6B8
637
Timing bkay. Count
through part of
preamble.
---,
I
I
Store Mark 1 ORed with
Mark 2 character. (Format
11 - 11111)
L_ --
I
----'
6BA/6C3
Set count and write 14
subgroups of all ones
(sync) characters (70
ones),
660
Store Mark 1 character.
(Mark 1 - 00111 )
6CD
Write A-Frame.
673
Clear format controls
(ready for datal.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
55-036
BRANCH TO WRITE FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
55-038
WRITE FROM LOAD POINT
ALU2
ALU1
-,
rc"ha=1 hardw;;e"'da;"-l
rALu2l0oPi~u;;iiMa;k
I data.
I
I
11 character recognized
,{data ready l.
I-
660
Data ready (Mark 1 active).
Drop sync line.
I flow controlling write
L - - -
-,
ALUl
ALU2
1
2/Sync/Sync/Mark
'---""1
677
Test all ones (written by
hardware). End of data.
68E/691
-',
I waiting for IBG._ _ _ -.oJ
-,,
I
r Af7e~e;;-1580- - - ,
I characters on tape, insert I
I a resync burst. (Mark I
~--
rALU2io~i; :hii; -
Store and write a
l-Character (Format 1010101 )
I
I
___ J
J.,- - - ~ J
T'
675
Load resync counter to
write a resync burst
every 158 storage
groups.
6AO
~----~---~
1)
-----
____I
3CO
I
ALU2 finished. Test for
errors, then set pending
status.
1----1
.- -- -- - - - -- -- ----
End of data. Allow for
residual and CRC frame
(4 groups).
695
Store and write Mark 2
character (Mark 2 11100)
688
Write 14 groups of all
ones (Format 11 11111l.
6ge
Store and write A2/Mark
2 character. (Format
01 + 4 - 11110)
55-038
, ---y'
(~
(
(
(
(-
c c
(
c~ C
55-040
BRANCH TO READ FROM LOAD POINT
Read from load point is basically performed by ALU2
anc! the hardware data flow controls.
Once ALU1 has triggered ALU2 to perform sense reset
to the drive, and again to initiate the read from load
point, ALU1 is basically finished. ALU1 tests to be sure
that the first service cycle takes place, then goes into a
loop until ALU2 finishes and sets Status D.
The read forward operation from load point steps
follow:
1.
ALU1 triggers ALU2 to issue a sense reset to the
drive.
2.
ALU1 triggers ALU2 to begin the read operation. If
Status D from ALU2 is sensed before the first
service cycle, an error is signalled.
3.
ALU2 tests the status of the drive and checks for
correct velocity.
4.
Move 3 in. (76,2mm) of tape, then test for a
1-track envelope indicating a 6250 bpi tape.
5.
Count through part of SAGC, then initiate read
SAGC circuits in the drive.
6.
Clock through 550 tachs, then check the Inverse
Tape Mark.
7.
When IBG is reached, fetch two bytes of drive
.
sense and test status to this point.
8.
Set read condition after gap control comes up
again, and wait for the Mark 1 character preceding
the data.
9.
The hardware data flow now takes over until the
end of data is sensed.
READ FROM LOAD POINT
ALU2
ALUl
22C
Test for ALU failure.
22F
055
Set ALUl Status D to
indicate sense reset.
Trigger ALU2 to do sense
reset to drive.
Index
~
X'OE'
---,
ALU2
Sense
Reset
Routine
I
ODE
+
Send device select,
command tag and reset
(X'02') to the drive.
10. Test for errors. ALU2 sets Status D when finished,
altering ALU 1.
11. ALU1 compares the modulo count then branches to
the status handler.
Drop Status In.
Reset Status D.
Load returns.
rw:;f'; ALU1. -
--,
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J
© Copyright International Business Machmes
Corporation 1976. 1979
55-040
55-042
BRANCH TO READ FROM lOAD POINT (Cont'd)
READ FROM LOAD POINT
ALUl
ALU2
ALUl
5A2
ALU2
IALul smii'ooping ~il - - ,
Branch to begin read.
IL ALU2
finishes.
____
ALU2
Read Forward
Routine
Index
~
I
..-l
18B
Set Status B. Turn on
tape operation to data
flow.
-,
X '33'
033
I
Turn on read tracer and
store read forward
command (X'40' to
Work 4).
Test Rewind Unload at
load point and Read
Backward.
239
Tach sensed.
Count down and branch
on overflow to test gap
control from TU.
Raise select and command
tag. Wait for positioning *
to drop in the drive.
Test BOT, if on, and
set up to move 3 in.
(76,2 mm) of tape.
*Up as long as drive
is moving.
265
3 in. (76,2 mm) of
I D area passed. Store
count and wait for
read time.
©
Copyright Internati~nal Business Machines Corporation -1976,
55-042
(', (/
(
(--
(
(- (> (:
_/
C
(~~.
f-
(,
,
(~.
BRANCH TO READ FROM LOAD POINT (Cont'd)
(~C
(/
(
(~
(-
C
(~/
j
C C C C'
,
'
55-044
READ FROM LOAD POINT
ALU1
r;.w1-;;lii~oPing- -
ALU2
26B
..,
ILuntil
finishes.
_ALU2
__
_ _ _ ..JI
Test 1-track envelope.
ALU1
ALU2
-1
rAwi~iliioopin; IL until
_ ALU2
_ _finishes.
___ _ J
Normal Path
270
1-Track and overflow.
Turn off PE control and
set hi-density control.
275
Count through part of
SAGC burst. Tape is
6250.
Nearing end of SAGC.
Test BOR and device
attention (SAGC
check!.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
Link 2 = 17
55-044
('
BRANCH TO READ FROM lOAD POINT (Cont'd)
55-046
READ FROM LOAD POINT
ALU2
ALUl
ALUl
217
ALU2
r-------,
I ALUl
looping until
I
___
L.ALU~nishes.
J
lDa-;;; and r-;;;-bu-;:;t -
I being handled by data
I flow.
L__
OAF
Branch if read out
counter (ROC) rotation,
Markl is sensed.
3CO
Stop to data flow.
3CA
compare .
.----1
I
Oata time-count for
2CA
resync burst. Wait
for end of data.
I
I
L _ _ _ -1I
3DB
.-------
-II
I
_ _ _ .J
....
---
(-
(-
(
C' C
(
(
('
(
(
C C (-' C C
j
(~
C\
57-006
OPER-NRZI
NRZI READ DATA FLOW
RC5 NRZI
Degate LRC 9 Trk
(Not) Correct Track
A
(9)
Yl D2
LRCR
CN021
'JI
Reg
LRCR Error
/'\!~'-F"""F--~~~:!.
(9)
13-16 Time
A
Reset LSR
Y1C2
Note: The 118 ns delay is a NRZI (1) Pulse Generator
which uses the de-skewed trailing edge of a NRZI
pulse from the tape unit.
Set Rd
Reg 2
Y1D2
CN021
NRZI
Read
NRZI
Reg
Reg
"iliili"liil"ii~~OE
•
XC011
from
50-002
(9)
NRZI Rd
NRZI Pulse
P,O-7
Y1D2
~N~RZ~~~ia"~"~r:---'
I
Rd ECC Data P
~~--_L;~)iii~~iii_- 50-002
50-002
(Reset)
Block NRZI Ones
(Not) Read Condition Latch
Y1D2
OR
CN031
Y1C2
CN251
RC6
OR
R/W VRC
Reset Rd
Reg 2
Y1D2
Y1C2
CN011
CN241
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
57-006
(";
OPER-TRANSLATION
57-020
WRITE TRANSLATOR (CARD A1E2)
Some tape subsystems use a six-bit BCD code. Each
character of the six-bit code can be translated to an
equivalent eight-bit character for processing by 9-track
tape subsystems. A translator in the tape control
translates eight-bit code to six-bit code while writing.
and translates six-bit code to eight-bit code while
reading. The translator operates only if Microprocessor
1 XOUT A bits 2 and 4 are on at the rise of TAPE OP
and Microprocessor 2 Stat bits 0 and 3 are on.
,
DC Reg 0-11
-Channel Buffer
Out p, 0-7
TRANSLATOR
0- 11
\
I-
+DC On
A
AND
&
OR
Logic
\
A1E2
FL
A1E2
r-.....
1
-~
DE
-~
DE
~
~
P, 0, 1
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
&.
-
F
0
G
H
I
P
Q
R
>
<
•(
I
J
K
L
M
N
S
T
U
V
W
X
,10
GM
00
B
C
D
E
L
M
N
6
F
0
7
P
Q
y
7
B
R
Z
9
<
t
Z
8
9
G
H
I
.
*
~
>
S
#I
'1(,
@
I
WS
y
MC
2
10
"
J
J
11
0
1
2
3
4
S
T
U
V
W
X
K
•
v
(
1
.
'1(,
I
WS
GM
4
3
01
10
>
<
A
J
K
L
M
N
t
I
B
e
D
E
F
G
H
I
BL
5
6
~
@
v
SM
6
TM
7
Q
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
R
Z
.. ".
-
0
P
S
•-
MC
5
00
#I
+
TM
SM
01
S
•-
+
o
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
A
'"
-Channel Buffer Out 0
'"
'"
I·
(
+
i
GM
B
MC
9
'"
BN041
A
0
A
1
A1E2
BN041
I
r-
,11
BltlO, 1
11
0
1
2
00
01
10
>
<
t
I
A
B
e
D
J
B
E
F
G
H
Q
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
9
I
R
Z
~
BL
".S
'1(,
I
WS
3
4
5
6
7
#I
'1(,
@
WS
v
•-
SM TM
10
11
K
L
M
N
0
P
(
+
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
~
#I
@
•
v
GM MC SM TM
12
13
14
15
B421
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
00
BL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#I
-A
01
B10
BA -BCD
11
~
-
a.
("~
o
I
I
J
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
K
A
B
e
0
E
0
F
P
Z
R
G
H
I
*
<
>
(a)
'1(,
v
WS
- •
TM
L
M
N
Me
Q
Notes:
[1] The graphics in these charts may not be identical
to those printed by the printer or printer-keyboard.
The graphics are intended as references for
translating bit codes on a read or write operation.
[2] The write translator accepts the complete EBCDIC
code and translates the bits to the BCD code.
However. the read translator translates the BCD
code only to the bits outlined.
. .
S
)
(
[3] When operating in the even-parity mode. the
EBCDIC blank (b\) is translated to a BCD substitute
blank (b\). and the BCD substitute blank is
translated to an EBCDIC blank (01000000). The odd
parity blank's bit code is 000000.
+
SM
GM
57-020
Copyright International Business Machmes Corporation 1976, 1979
'",)
PG
4 , 5 , 6 , 7 , 2,3 i - T r l C k l
Note 2
©
+7 Track
2-7
A1E2
BCD - 6 Bit Code
EBCDIC - 8 Bit Code
BL
PC
~41
BN051
"-
~"
BN031
-- --
BN021
10
Reg
\.
-Channel Buffer Out 1
,DO,
01
\
+XLATE On
ECBDIC AND BCD CODES
00
BL
A
B
C
D
E
-
6
DCD
P Bit Latch
0
On 7-track read operations with the translator off. the
tape control inserts zeros in the two high order bit
positions (BUS IN bits 0 and 1) of each byte when
transferring it to channel.
4567
I
50-001
Write
DC Gate
BN021
-Channel Buffer Out P
-Jl....
4
6
OE
p, 0-7 to Chan
Buffer Gate
BR101
DE
Reg
On 7-track write operations with the translator off. the
tape control discards the two high-order bit positions
(BUS OUT bits 0 and 1) of each byte from channel.
Only the six low order data bits (plus a parity bit) are
transferred to the tape unit.
Bit.
----- -
0-11
-Gate Bytes
1-4 to DC
h~
C) 0
()
()
"--
-"
I
\.
'\
)
(-
(
c
(
(-
57-021
OPER-LOGIC CIRCUITS
READ TRANSLATOR (CARD A1E1)
Read Translator Data Flow
ANDs and ORs translate bits 0-7 to determine EBCDIC
code.
Read
Translator
ECC Buffer
-
-~
6250 or PE
P
1
I-2
-- -
--
--
0
I-0
I--
3
~
(Read Bus)
Generate P Bit
-
A
MP2 Stat Bits 0, 3
-
BN311
Translated 2
i--
Translated 3
E
R
5
7
~
0
4
6
0
E
C
0
Read Data Bits 0- 7
Translated 0
~
XOUTA Bits 2. 4
2
-
Translated 4
-
Translated 6
3
4
I-5
6
i-7
-
Read Xlate Bits
(7 Trk or Xlatel
BNOBl
GJ031-041
OR
Read Data Trks 07
x-
OR
NRZ, Rd
Data Reg
--'-- --
BRlll
CKOOl
Combined ECC Data 0-7.
P
0
~
NRZI Pulse
(Read Bus)
1
-- - --
2
3
4
I-5
-
I-6
I-7
CN031
57-021
OPER-LOGIC CIRCUITS (Cont'd)
51-025
WRITE DATA CONVERTER (CARD A1E2)
The data converter is used for 7-track write and read
forward operations only.
The data converter is disabled during read backward
operations, but is left on for the next write or read
forward operation.
The data converter is turned on and off by a mode set
command. When Microprocessor 1 XOUT A BIT 2 is on
at the rise of TAPE OP (MP2, Status 0), the data
converter is off. When Microprocessor 1 XOUTA BIT 2
is off at the rise of TAPE OP (MP2, Status 0)' the data
converter is on.
During a write operation, three 8-bit EBCDIC bytes from
channel are converted to four 6-bit BCD characters for
writing on tape. If the byte count is not a multiple of
three, any remaining bits of the last 6-bit character are
set to zero.
Write Data Convert Register
DATA CONVERT WRITE TIMING
Gate Byte 1
111 i10 i 9
_
_- ___
__
__________
_____rl~______~--
i i i i i i
8
7
6
5
4
Not 7 Track
Sl~
Channel Buffer Out O. 1
~r1~
Write 0
Gate Byte 2
______
________
__________ ______
.__________~r1~____
------~
~r1~
Write 1
r1~
Gate Byte 3
Write 2
Write 3
Channel Buffer Out
(0-7)
50-000
....--x-..t
I
3 12 11
Gate Byte 2
. ::..;;;.;.;. . . :. . __-----J~I. •
~ate Byte 3
I I iI
I 7I
0
•
171 6 15
i i I
4
2
3
11
6 1 5
I
14 I
i I
I
0
--
~
I
~L8
--
~
I
IrraJ
--
' .'
t
~
I
2
~
3
~
4
t-5
~
6
7
BN041
-Data Converter ON
+
7Track
I'...
0
1
2
3
r--
+DC Group
1Write
-OE
'I'...
Decoder
51-025
(L Copyright InternatIonal Business Machines CorporatIon 1976. 1979
,~
0 0
t~
~ff
10
~j
0 0 0
(To Channel Buffer Gate)
50-001
t--
•
BN021
,,....'~
Write Data Bits
C) 0
C)
)
"--Y
/.--~,
/
,
"
r"
")
0 0
.~
'---.)
C)
(C
(
(
(
(/
(:
(
(
OPER-LOGIC CIRCUITS. (Cont'd)
57-026
READ DATA CONVERTER
During a read operation, four 6-bit characters (plus
parity) from tape are converted to three 8-bit bytes
(plus parity) for transfer to channel. If the character
count of the block is not a multiple 0 f four, any
remaining positions in the last byte having bits are
padded with zeros, and a data conve rt check is
indicated.
2A - 7A
-Combined ECC Data 2-7
........
Reg
57·021
+Set Rd DCC Reg A
C
R
........
2B - 7B
Reg
r--..
- Read Translate Bit 2, 3, 4, 6
57·021
-Data Converter ON Pow
GU .......
+Data Converter ON
GL .......
+Set Rd DC Reg B
C
+ Reset B Rd DCC Bfr
R
0-7
Reg
........
I
-Combined ECC Data 0, 1
57-021
-Send 1 More
and Cnt 2
t--.. - Read
Data Bits P, 0-7
1-5
OR
DOT
+Reset A Rd DCC Bfr
........
-Read Count 4
.......
-Data Converter ON
-
A
OR
.......
~l
~
1
I
.........
DCD
- 7 Track
A
DE
-Send one more and Cnt 4 or 6
r--..
2
BN031
I
0-3
r--..
OR
r--..
- Read Count 6
I"-
PG
50-000
A1E2
BN061
57-026
57-027
N·OTES:
57-027
o
o
o
"... '.\
r
'.
./
/'
">.
'-..j
C)
(0
,,---j
r"""
.",-.~
'\
;/
'-
y
(
(
(.
('
(
(./
c
(~.'
-,
./
(~
c
(~
58-005
OPER-S/360-S/370 SWITCHING (DATA IN HANDLING)
OBJECTIVES
1.
The switching circuit enables a 380.3-2 to be
attached to either a System/36o. or a System/37o..
2.
Selection is accomplished by plugging cards to
reflect system type on which the tape subsystem is
installed. See installation, Page 90.-130. or AAo.10.,
Sheet 2.
3.
When plugged for S/36o., a Service In/Service Out
sequence is used.
4.
When plugged for S/37o., a Service In/Service
Out/Data In/Data Out sequence is used.
S370
Pin
R
i'
"
"
"
")
Chan B
Pm
/
/
/
S360
Pm
/
/
CE Mode
Select Signal Chan B
Trap Chan B
(Not) SW to Chan A
-
SW to B
A
SW to Chan A
r--
Machine Reset
lOR
-
S370
FL
N
Switched to Chan B
A1C2
lilt..
-
Pin
OR
DOT
A1C2
85091
Service Cycles Only
,
""
85091
B2N2
XM10l
", ,
Chan A
Pin
,.
/
7
S360
Pin
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
/
/
58-005
58-010
OPER-TWO-CHANNEl SWITCH (TCS)
A 3803-2 tape control with a two-channel switch (TCS)
[1] operates with two channel interfaces. All 3803-2
operations can be performed on either channel
interface. Channels attached to the TCS interfaces can
be attached to the same system or to separate
systems, allowing tape units on the tape control with
the TCS feature to be shared by two channels on a
single system, or by two systems. In addition to all
normal operations, a tape control with this feature can
execute Reserve and Release commands for program
control of interface switching. The large block in the
center of the diagram and the unshaded blocks
represent control circuits for a standard tape control.
The shaded blocks represent additional logical
functions installed on the tape control for the
Two-Channel switch.
Channel interface lines going into or out of the tape
control pass through interface switch circuits. The
circuits consist of gated drivers that connect the tape
control to either channel interface (A or B).
Address decoders monitor the bus out lines of each
interface. If the tape control address appears on the
bus out lines along with an ADDRESS OUT tag, the
decoders send a signal to the interface switch controls.
When no interfering conditions exist, the controls
connect that interface to the tape control. If the tape
control is reserved or operating with the other
interface, a 'short busy' sequence is sent to the
interface attempting to break in.
Tie-breaker logic (XM101) controls the interface switch
lines so only one channel operates the subsystem,
preventing one channel from interfering with the
operation of the other. When neither interface is
reserved or operating, the interface switch circuits are
in a neutral state, and either interface can initiate an
Initial Selection sequence.
Both A & B Disabled Make CE Panel Offline
Enable
Manual
0
0A
When the tape control becomes available, a Control
Unit End status byte is sent to the channel that
previously received the BUSY signal.
CE Panel
Partition
B
Disable
TIE
Two Systems Sharing a Tape Control
Through the Use of a Two-Channel
Breaker
:-:
Switch
XM10l
Logic
<>
...
,':'::
58-030
Address
Decoder
r-Switched to A
A
FC101
Switched to B .
CBO A
..
A Out Lines
A
Channel
75·001
Offline
Controls
Channel
..
Interface
-
Switch A
-
Out Lines
FC061
FC081
Address
....
Data Channel
I nterfa ces
Decoder
B
XM091
Interface
B Out Lines
-
B
0·-------------7
Tape Units
XM055
SWitch B
Out Lines
OR
FC081
"I
I
.-
Standard
I
Tape Control
I
Circu its
I
I
CBI A
Interface
-
50-002, 50-003
A
Switch A
FC231
In Lines
I
I
50-000, 50-001,
I
I
I
~
CBa B
Hold Interface
r----------,
FC241
Device End
Register B
L --r---
...
.':.:.:.:-:-::.::
(;:::
.
To
ROSl
XM071
:.: ..
CBI B
Interface
SWitch B
In Lines
::::
B
XM131
XM131
I""
CU Busy A
NOTE:
CU Busy
[1] TCS is shown as 2CS on logic pages and in the MFI.
=Added Logic
:->
f!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
..
CU Busy B
':::' .
A
FC031
B
XM031
If) Copyright International Business Machmes Corporation 1976. 1979
0
I~)
''1l
V
() 0 0 0
0
,,---p
0
0
0
0
\J
(~,
V
0
C)
/--",
".
/
'/'
'1
J
\,
\.
/
/~'1
,,-y
r~
'\.....~
/-\
"',,- )
"
58-010
' '.
/"
(-
(
(,-
(~
(-
(--
(
(- (
r-
(-- (-
(-
(
(-
{~
(~'
~/
c
("'
_i
c\
(~
(''\
./
C
(~
<: c'
('
c
(-'~
When a tape unit completes an operation, a Device End
signal is sent to the channel. A tape control with the
Two-Channel switch uses the second Device End LSR
to ensure that the Device End is returned to the channel
that initiated the operation. See Device End on 58-012.
RESETS
The Reset circuits of the two-channel switch are
interlocked so a Reset from one channel cannot disrupt
operations on the other channel. A Reset can be
accepted only from the operating channel. Resets are
further conditioned to prevent a channel from
destroying information needed by the other channel.
INTERFACE SWITCH CONTROL
A tape control with a Two-Channel switch monitors
addresses on two channel interfaces. When the tape
control receives its own address, it tries to start an
operation with the interface attempting selection. If the
tape control is neither busy nor reserved, the
OPERATIONAL IN latch for that interface is activated.
If the tape control is busy or reserved to interface A,
interface B ADDRESS OUT will be answered with a
SHORT BUSY sequence, and vice versa. The interface
which received SHORT BUSY will receive a CU END
when the tape control is available. If the channel stacks
status containing UNIT CHECK or UNIT EXCEPTION,
the tape control will remain connected to that interface
until status is accepted. If both interfaces attempt
selection simultaneously, a tie-breaker circuit resolves
the selection. See 58-030.
The purpose of interface switching circuits is to connect
the tape control 'common' circuits to whichever
interface is operating. To operate with an interface,
output from the OPERATIONAL IN latch (FC141) gates
interface drivers for the corresponding interface when
OPERATIONAL IN is gated by -SWITCHED TO
CHANNEL A (or B) (58-030).
The two-channel switch microprogram is entered by
branching from Initial Selection (or Ending Sequence) to
ensure that data is sent to or from the proper interface.
RESERVE/RELEASE OPERATION
•
A Sense/Reserve command locks the tape control
to an interface until a Sense/Release command or
a Reset is received from that interface.
A Sense/Release command resets the RESERVE
flag to allow operation on either interface.
•
A Sense/Reserve or Sense/Release command,
while chained, results in Command Reject.
After Initial Selection, operation of Sense/Reserve
and Sense/Release commands are identical to a
Sense command.
The Sense/Reserve and Sense/Release commands
enable the tape control to remain locked to one
interface. Executing a Sense / Reserve command places
a tape control under exclusive control of one channel
until that channel issues a Sense/Release command. A
Sense/Reserve command from channel A or B activates
the RESERVE flag for A or B. A Sense/Release
command deactivates the RESERVE flag.
Modifier bits, in positions 0,1,2, and 3 of a Sense
command byte identify the reserve and release
operations. After Initial Selection, modifier bit 2
determines whether the command is a Reserve or a
Release. If bit 2 is on, (command code F4) Reserve is
indicated. If bit 2 is off, (command code 04) Release is
indicated.
SENSE/RESERVE COMMAND [F4)
A Sense / Reserve command locks the tape control to
the interface of whichever channel initiated the
command.
During Command Out of a Sense/Reserve command,
the current command is masked for the F4
configuration. If an (F4) command is recognized, the
microprogram checks for chaining (SETRESV). If
chaining is not indicated, CURFLAG (20) is set in
FLAGSl (LSR 10) to reserve the tape control. If
chaining is indicated, Command Reject is set.
In a valid Sense/Reserve command, bit 2 from the
CHANNEL TAGS IN (CTI) register (FC161) prevents
resetting the SWITCHED TO CHANNEL A or
SWITCHED TO CHANNEL B latch (58-030) and the
tape control remains reserved to the operating interface.
(~/
C
(~
58-011
OPER-TWO-CHANNEL SWITCH (TCS) (Cont'd)
The Sense/Reserve command (F4) locks the
two-channel switching circuits to one interface, sci the
other interface does not have access to the tape
control. The Sense/Release command (04) resets the
reserved condition and allows the tape control to accept
commands from either interface.
C
(58-030) until a reset or Sense/Release command is
received from the operating interface.
interfaces are partitioned (both switches set to
DISABLE), the tape control is offline and the CE panel
controls can be used.
SENSE/RELEASE COMMAND (04)
A Sense/Release command resets the RESERVE flag to
allow the tape control to operate with either interface.
As in the sense / reserve operation, the Sense / Release
command checks for chaining. A valid Sense/Release
command leaves position 2 of the CHANNEL TAGS IN
register reset so the SWITCHED TO CHANNEL A and
SWITCHED TO CHANNEL B latches are reset at the
end of each chain of commands.
SELECTION
Address decoders in the tape control continuously
monitor both interfaces. If the correct address bits
arrive on the bus out lines along with an ADDRESS
OUT tag, the SELECT OUT latch is reset. CONTROL
UNIT END latch OFF ANDs with a minus output from
the SELECT OUT latch to generate TRAP CHANNEL A
or TRAP CHANNEL B.
Assume that the tape control is idle and is addressed
by channel A. The TRAP CHANNEL A line ANDs with
the SELECT SIGNAL CHAN A to set the SWITCHED
TO CHANNEL A (tie breaker) latch. SWITCHED TO
CHANNEL A ANDs with DELAY SELECT SIGNAL
CHAN A to generate INITIAL SELECTION CHAN A.
Once interface A is addressed and selected, it arms the
CONTROL UNIT BUSY AND circuit in interface B. If
interface B tries to use the tape control during the time
interface A is locked onto the switch, the CONTROL
UNIT END latch for interface B is set.
IMPLICIT CONNECTION
An implicit connection is one that does not depend on
program intervention for release. The duration of the
connection is determined by the time required for the
.
tape control to perform a command or a chain of
commands. The switch reverts to neutral on completion
(at the tape control level) of the last command in a
chain.
An implicit connection is extended if the channel stacks
primary status. The stacked status must then be
accepted by the channel to terminate the connection. If
the status byte contains Unit Check, a contingent
connection is made and acceptance of the status by the
channel does not terminate the connection.
If the channel stacks secondary status containing Unit
Exception or Unit Check, connection to that channel will
be maintained until the status is accepted by the
channel. If the status byte contains Unit Check, a
contingent connection is made and acceptance of status
by the channel does not terminate the connection.
If the channel stacks secondary status other than Unit
Check or Unit Exception, the switch returns to neutral
and is available to either channel. Any further attempts
by the tape control to present this status to the channel
that indicated STACK STATUS are controlled by
SUPPRESS OUT from that channel.
When interface A is finished operating, MP1 determines
that the Two-Channel switch is installed, and MP2
checks status of the CONTROL UNIT END latches. If
either CUE latch is on, MP1 presents CUE status to the
interface associated with that latch. The CUE will have
a random tape unit address unless presented along with
Device End.
PARTITIONING
Partitioning, achieved by operating the Enable/Disable
switches, restricts the accessability of the tape control
to either channel. Partitioning bypasses SELECT OUT
and degates all interface functions. When both
Output of the SWITCHED TO A (or B) latch blocks
interface switch circuits for the opposite interface
58-011
(~/
OPER-TWO-CHANNEL SWITCH (TCS) (Cont'd)
58-012
CONTINGENT CONNECTION
CONTROL UNIT END
A contir.gent connection is initiated when the last
status byte contains Unit Check. The connection is
maintained until a command other than Test I/O or
NOP is received from' the channel to which status was
presented. Any command other than Test I/O or NOP
to that tape unit clears the contingent connection if the
tape unit is READY.
The CONTROL UNIT END latch (58-030) remains on,
remembering that channel B tried to break into channel
A operations. This latch also sends +CUE PENDING
CHAN B to the microprogram branch-an-condition logic
(AB161) to notify the B interface that a Channel End is
pending. When the tape control is no longer operating
with, or reserved by, interface A. the SW TO CHAN A
latch turns off, -TRAP CHAN B is active, and the
SELECT CHAN B line is still active to turn on the SW
TO CHAN B latch.
The purpose of the contingent connection is to ensure
an available path to the tape unit and the transmission
of sense data from the tape unit to the proper channel.
If a Test I/O or NOP is issued by the addressed
channel to a tape unit other than the one contingently
connected, the tape control responds with SHORT
BUSY and retains the connection.
Stacking of status other than Unit Check or Unit
Exception does not maintain the interface connection.
The TCS will be reset to neutral, and the tape control
will become available to either channel.
STACK INTERRUPT
A Halt I/O command received by the tape control
before the channel accepts the ending status causes
the MP1 microprogram to reset OP IN and check for
two-channel operation and contingent connection. If a
contingent connection is needed to prevent loss of
error information, the microprogram branches to a
'Hold Interface' routine.
The SW TO CHAN B latch gates the output from
OPERATIONAL IN to channel B to send a Unit Status
byte to channel B. The status byte will contain a CUE
(bit 2) indicating the tape control is now available for
other operations. A standard REQUEST-IN sequence is
used to transmit the CUE status byte.
BUSY
With no contingent connection, an interrupt cycle is
initiated to present the stacked status. CONTROL UNIT
BUSY will be reset (if applicable) and HOLD
INTERFACE will be set if the STACK or STATUS
PENDING flag is on.
At the end of an operation, the SW TO CHAN A (or B)
latch is reset unless a chain, STACK, INTERRUPT, or
UNIT CHECK condition exists. OPERATIONAL IN is
reset in the Burst Ending Sequence when CHANNEL
TAGS IN register bit 7 is reset.
While the tape control is operating with one interface,
a SELECT from the other interface will be answered
with a SHORT BUSY signal (Bits P, 1, 3). Assume that
the B interface is operating when the A interface
attempts to address the tape control (58-030). The
SWITCHED TO CHANNEL B latch blocks the setting of
the SWITCHED TO CHANNEL A latch. However,
-SELECT SIGNAL CHANNEL A is ANDed with -ADDR
'C()MPARE CHAN. A and NOT PROPAGATE SEL OUT
CHAN A to reset the CHANNEL A SEL OUT latch. With
the latch reset. the minus output of the off side of the
latch is ANDed with -ENABLE CHAN A and
OPERATIONAL IN to condition one input to the channel
A CUE latch. A second conditioning input is
OPERATIONAL IN, and the third is the minus output
from the CU BUSY AND circuit. Thus, the CUE latch
for channel A, is turned on to send CU BUSY STATUS
CHAN A to the A interface.
DEVICE END
The purpose of Device End circuits is to signal the data
channel when a tape unit has completed a task and is
ready to accept a new one. On a tape control with the
two-channel switch feature, separate LSRs in MP2 are
used to store the Device End signal for each channel.
The second Device End LSR ensures that the Device
End is returned to the channel that initiated the
operation.
With OP IN reset, no REQUEST IN, no ADDRESS OUT,
and no SELECT OUT for the tape control, the SELECT
OUT latch is active. (Note that the SELECT OUT latch
is turned on when the tape control is inactive.) With
the SELECT OUT latch active, the plus output degates
-RESPONDING TO CHAN A (or B). -RESPONDING TO
CHAN A (or B) inactive resets the SW TO CHAN A (or
B) latch, and the tape control is available for another
selection sequence.
Tie-breaker logic (XM 101) on 58-010) controls the
interface switch lines so only one channel operates the
subsystem, preventing one channel from interfering
with the operation of the other. When neither interface
is reserved or operating, the interface switch circuits
are in a neutral state, and either interface can initiate an
Initial Selection sequence.
Address decoders monitor the bus out lines of each
interface. If the tape control address appears on the
bus out lines along with an ADDRESS OUT tag, the
decoders send a signal to the interface switch controls.
When no interfering conditions exist, the controls
connect that interface to the tape control. If the tape
control is reserved or operating with the other
interface, a 'short busy' sequence is sent to the
interface attempting to break in.
When the tape control becomes available, a Control
Unit End status byte is sent to the channel that
previously received the BUSY signal.
See 58-030 for schematic details.
A Device End received while the two-channel switch is
in a neutral state causes the tape control to enter an
interrupt status. The tape control then presents the
Device End to the channel that initiated the Device End
operation, if that interface has not been partitioned.
Partitioning resets pending Device Ends for that
interface.
STACK
The BUSY signal sent to channel A is a Unit Status
byte with bits 1 and 3 on. Bit 3 indicates BUSY, while
bit 1 (status modifier) indicates that the BUSY condition
applies to the tape control. Bits P, 1, and 3 are forced
onto the BUS IN lines a1 the same time the STATUS IN
tag line is forced up. The STATUS IN latch is not
turned on during this SHORT BUSY sequence.
TIE BREAKER
In some cases the channel may refuse the end status
byte, this turns on a 'stack' condition. If the status byte
contains Unit Check or Unit Exception, the tape control
remains connected to that interface until the channel
accepts the status. If the status byte contains Unit
Check, the connection is maintained until a command
other than NOP or Test I/O is received from the
channel to which the status was presented. This
procedure makes certain the channel has an
opportunity to interrogate a unit check condition before
the other channel disturbs the tape control. When the
interface connection is maintained because of a unit
check, the connection is defined as "contingent" (not
part of the normal routine).
An interrupt due to a Control Unit End sends Device
End, including the address of that device, and Control
Unit End, to the channel.
58-012
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979. 1983
0
\~
~,
\
:
,,~
."~~
",-y
r~
'\.....yI
0
,
,
()
'-
r,
~
'J
()
0
0
0
\~
0
~
0
0')
""-..Y
('')
'~
~
:~
/
"
/
\
!r- -~"
/~
I
'-- ,}/
()
"-.,
/
\
,,)
(
(
(
(
(~I
C.'"
(
'
/
'"
(
"
. /
--'
'.-.'.\
/
OPER-TIE BREAKER (TCS)
TCS SELECTION AND TIE-BREAKER LOGIC
(PART 1)
Note: See 58-012 for description of circuit operation.
-Trap Chan A
SeIOut
+Enable Chan A
Address Out Chan A
r-......
+Address Compare Chan A
A
'"
+Address Out Chan A
A
r--....
+Op In Chan A
FC031
'"'"r--....
A
f'....
f'.....
,......
-Request In Chan A
f'....
r--..... ~
A
-Address Compare Chan A
OR
"'-
-select Signal Chan A
A
OR
:::::-
f'....
A
'"
'"
+Select Signal Chan A
f'....
OR
'" -
+Request In Chan A
If'..
'""'-
J
~
I
FC031
~
FC031
A
-
A
-
A
-Select Signal Chan A
"'-
'"r--....
f'...
r--.....
........
FC031
Bypass
A
OR
~
A
FC221
-Bypass Sel Out
N
FC031
-Switched to Channel B
I
-Enable Chan A
FC041
r--.....
A
+CTI Bit 2 Hold
Inter or Busy
+Operational In
r-OR ~
~
+Mach Reset
~
A
(To Interface status in) p. 1.3
+CU Busy Status Chan A
~
CUE
'"f'....
":Delay Select
Signal Chan A
I--
AB131
CUE Pending Chan A
(Branch On Condition)
N
OR
A
OR
r--
f'.,.
A
I-A
OR
+Gen Reset Chan A
+Address
Comp Chan A
"'-
-Reset CUE Chan A
N
A
~
f'...
+Internal Mach Reset
f'....
X"MThl
A
,r---....
"'-
(also Op In)
r--.....
'"
"''""'-
i----
f'...
Sw to A
-Reset Chan A Latches
"'-
~
-
A
i'-..
f'....
FC031
L
FC031
Not General Reset Chan AB
FC031
A
~
A
'"
r---....
.......
r--.....
-Select Signal Chan A
A
-TrapROS
FC141
i'-..
r--
f'...
f'....
-Initial Selection ABCE
FC051
AB171
FC031
~
-CU Busy Reset Sw to B f'....
OR
+CE Initial Selection Tag
"'-
-Address Compare Chan Af'....
XM101
A
J"'-....
CU Busy
r-.....
+Initial Selection Chan A
FC031
-Responding to Chan A
FC051
-Switched to Channel A
f'....
1'...
00
\
3803-2/3420
1 23
00
4
5
6
o
7
b-..
-Enable Chan A
,r---....
"'-
A
i'-..
-Op In Chan A
(To I n te rf ace Drillers)
8
I
~--------------------------~------------------~-------------------------------------------------'
58-031
.©
6
+Op In Chan A
A
CODvrinht International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
58-030
58-031
OPER-TIE BREAKER (TCS) (Cont'd)
58-030
n
TCS SELECTION AND TIE-BREAKER LOGIC
(PART 2)
I
/~~--------------------------~----------------------------~
123
45
6
7
8\
00
I
I
0
Op In
A
I--
OR
Q
A
rA
rA
FC051
'"
~
FC141
+Op In Chan B
A
t'--...
-Switched to Channel B "'-Trap Chan B
XM051
'"
A
-Enable Chan B ' "
Sw to B
"'-Reset Chan B Ltchs
"'b
-Select Signal Chan B
'""'~
~
'"t-......
A
-Addr Out Chan B
OR ~
""
+Enable Chan B
A
+Addr Camp Chan B ' "
+Addr Out Chan B
A
+Select Signal Chan B
A
+Op In Chan B
'"
t"--..
'"
XM031
I--
~
"'-
'" -
-Select Signal Chan B
~
.~
A
-Addr Compare Chan B ' "
A
'"
'"
f'....
OR
f'....
A
'"
OR
A
~
r--
"XM031
A
Bypass
i--
A
-Select Signal Chan B
-
-
"'-
A
,........
A
OR
'"'" -
A
N
.........
~
"'-
XM031
A
+CU Busy Status Chan B
~
-E nable Chan B
(also Op In)
-Delay Sel Signal Chan B
~
A
t--
W
'"
-Responding to Chan B
"'-
""
1"'--_
1 t-......I--..
A k
(To Interface Status In} P, 1,3
CUE
A
OR
'"'" --A
~
XM031
+1 nternal Mach Reset
OR
-Reset CUE Chan B
t-......_
"') A I
+Gen Reset Chan B
XM031
-Switched to Chan B
f'....
,........
,........
-Address Compare Chan B ,........
-Select Sig Chan B
-CU Busy Reset Sw to A
'"
'"
t--
'" 1
r-~
o
,
!
"--_./
+CUE Pending Chan B
AB161
(I nterface Branch on Cond Chan B)
A
+Initial Selection Chan B
AB171
A
t-......
~
XM031
XM031
58-031
Copyright International Business Machmes Corporation 1976.
!"--)
N
.--
CU Busy
Ii··
XM121
XM031
~
XM031
+Addr Camp Chan B
-Propagate Sel Out Chan B
f'....
f'....
~
XM101
A
-t::::..
'"'"
A
-Request In Chan B
XM051
-Op In Chan B
(To Interface Drivers}
SelOut
f--
+ReQuest In Chan B "'-
t--
OR
1",
r--.....
o
(~
\,-~
()
C)
(
(
(
(
~'
'-_/'
OPER-DEVICE SWITCHING CONFIGURATIONS
DESCRIPTION
Device switching allows access to a maximum of
sixteen tape units by two, three, or four tape controls,
and permits simultaneous operation of as many tape
units as there are tape controls.
3803 Models 1 and 2 can be mixed in a switching
configuration; however, attempting to access a 3420
Model 4, 6, or 8 through a 3803 Model 1 produces
unpredictable results.
Device switching is performed via the Communicator
and Device Switch features. Three Device Switch
features (58-051) available with the tape subsystem
are:
2 Control Switch used with 2x8 and 2x16
configurations
3 Control Switch used with 3x8 and 3x16
configurations
4 Control Switch used with 4x8 and 4x16
configurations
The minimum switching subsystem configuration allows
two tape controls to access up to 8 tape units and is
called a 2x8 configuration. The maximum configuration
is 4 tape controls and 16 tape units (4x16). A
non-switching configuration (1 x8) is referred to as
Selection Logic.
Device Switching logic is installed only in those tape
controls that have attached tape units.
The location of the Device Switches depends on the
configuration desired. For example: In a 2x8, 3x8, or
4x8 configuration, the switching feature is required only
on the first tape control while in the 2x16, 3x16, and
4x16 configurations, the switching feature is required
on Tape Controls 1 and 2 (58-051). The 2x16
configuration consists of two tape controls, each with a
Communicator 1, a 2 Control Switch, and eight tape
units. The tape controls may be connected to either
different channels of the same system or on different
systems.
Device switching logic is logically invisible (except for
BUSY responses during Initial Selection and Device End
interrupts, which result when tape units become
available). Device switching logic is modular to allow
flexibility for a variety of system configurations.
Subsystem priority and device addressing are assigned
by pluggable jumpers within the switch. Any tape unit
may be partitioned (made unavailable) to any tape
control via toggle switches on the tape control
operator's panel (58-060).
( ' ,'. C'"
"
,
./
58-050
2 Control Switch
4 Control Switch
The 2 Control Switch is a 2x8 configuration of
hardware switching logic (58-051, 58-055). Tape Units
7 (attached to Tape Control 1) can be accessed by
the Communicator in Tape Control 2 as well as the
Communicator of Tape Control 1. A 2x16 configuration
is obtained by installing a 2 Control Switch in both
Tape Controls 1 and 2, allowing the Communicator in
each tape control to access its own eight 342Os,as
well as 3420s of the other tape control.
A 4x8configuration is obtained by installing a 4 Control
Switch.in Tape Control 1 and a Communicator 1 in
Tape Controls 2, 3, and 4 (58-051). Tape units attach to
Tape Control 1.
o-
3 Control Switch
A 3x8 configuration is obtained by installing a 3 Control
Switch in Tape Control 1 only and a Cbmmunicator 1 in
Tape Controls 1, 2, and 3 (58·051). Tape units attach to
Tape Control 1.
A 4x16 configuration is obtained by installing a 4
Control Switch in both Tape Controls 1 and 2. Two
more tape controls must be added to the configuration.
Tape Controls 3 and 4 do not contain any switching
hardware or attach any tape units, but each contains a
communicator.
The 3 Control Switch and the 4 Control Switch are
expanSions otthe 2 Control Switch. They allow access
to eIght attached tape units by the additional
Communicators.
A 3x16 configuration is obtained by installing a3
Control Switch in both Tape Controls 1 and 2. A third
tape control must be added to the configuration. Tape
Control 3 does not contain any switching hardware or
attach any tape units, but does contain a
Communicator.
3803-2/3420
© Coovright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
58-050
OPER---DEVICE SWITCHING CONFIGURATIONS (Cont'd)
1x 8 Configuration
2 X 8 Configuration
Tape Control
Number 1
Tape Control
Number 1
2 x 16 Configuration
Notes:
Tape Control
Number 2
[1] Maximum of 16 tape units and 4 tape controls.
[2] Tape units attach only. to tape controls with
switching features.
Com 1
[3] Any or all control units may have two channel
switch features.
0···· ·········7
Tape Units
[4] For 3420 Model 8 power requirements, see 90-180.
0··············7
Tape Units
0.............. 7
8 .. ·· ...... F
Tape Units
Tape Units
3 x 16 Configuration
3 X 8 Configuration
Tape Control
Number 1
Tape Control
Number 2
r.....
Com 1·
Communicator' .
f'
Tape Control
Numb.!lr 1
Tape Control
Number 3
Com 1
r ~ommunlcator ~
L.
~:.~i.:,:{;;,:~··-'·~:~~::·S
3 Control
SWItch
Tape Control
Numb~r 2
~
Tape Control
Number 3
Communicator.
Com 1
,
a;~5
Com 2
3 Control
!""
CommunlcatOI
~:~::;.(;;; ....;.,::~:.;;~:~!~
Communicator
... ·7
0······· .. ·.···7
Tape Units
········F
Tape Units
4 x 16 Configuration
4 x 8 Configutation
Tape Control
Number 1
Tape Control
Number 1.
Tape Control
Number 3
Tape Control
Number 2
Tape Control
NiJmber 4
Com 1
Com 1
Com 1
Tape Control
Number 4
0.............. 7
0-.. ·.......... 7
Tape Units
Tape Units
8.............. F
. Tape Units
58-051
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
0
0
\0
/'"",",,\,
I
/"---"'\
.~
'-
/
'''\
'"\
/"
!.
"
.7
)
(
(
r'
(-
(
(
(
(~i
(/ (
C
('
("
(~
/
-"
(C_
(~~
C
(.,
(~
c
OPER-2x8 SWITCH LOGIC
-~.
(
. ./
58-055
OPERATOR PANEL SWITCHES (16)
Switch Section A on Tape Control 1 directs Tape
Control 1's access path to Tape Units 0-7. Switch
Section B on Tape Control 1 directs Tape Control 2's
access to Tape Units 0-7.
r
r- Tape ControI1--------,
Addresses Jumpered 0-7
Secondary Interface
I
AO-A7
BO-B7
TU Online/Offline SWitches
IEnable/Disable)
I
CrossPOint SWitches
I
I
I
I
I
I
L____
Blank'
Cross
Point
Point
~-----------
----~
-------- ___ J
Tape
Unit 0
Cross
The Secondary Interface is not used
on the 2 l( 8, 3 x 8, or 4 x8 configurations .
Tape Control 2 --------...,
I
Communicator 1 Feature
I
Addresses J
Q- 7
II
.. I
Secondary
I
I
I nterface
I
I
I
I
I
II
Switch Section A
t
J
,
Blank
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
Tape
Unit 7
58-055
OPER-2x16 SWITCH LO'GIC
I
58-060
r
Tape Control 1
TapeControl2- -
Communicator 1 Feature
Addresses Jumpered 0-7
-
-
-
-
-I
-
Communicator 1 Feature
Addresses Jumpered 8-F
Secondary
Interface
Primary
Interface
Primary
Interface
Interboard
Flat
Cables
Interboard
Flat
Cables
h Section 8
Crosspoint SWitches
Crosspoint SWltcht's
I
I
I
_I
L
Tape
Unit 0
Tape
Unit 7
Switch section A on tape control'
directs tape control "s access path to
tape units 0-7. Switch section B on
tape control' directs tape control 2's
access to tape units 0-7.
L
~
Tape
Unit
a
OPERATION
LINE DEFINITIONS (58-100)
The Device Switch is controlled by lines from the tape
controL Although there are necessary switching delays,
data transfers, control requests, and responses, tape
unit status is sent to the tape control as if the switch
were not present.
Busy/Tach: The BUSY/TACH line indicates the state
of the device (busy or not busy) to the tape controL
Selection: When DEVICE SELECT (58-090) is activated,
with the device address on the DEVICE SWITCH bus
and the node is enabled, the switch tries to set the
COMMITIED latch for the node. Note: A "node" is
the logic circuitry required to select and assign one
tape unit to a requesting tape controL If the device has
already been selected by another tape control, a BUSY
indication is returned to the tape control attempting
selection. If the device is not busy, the COMMITIED
latch is set. The latch output is then sent to the other .
tape control nodes for that device to prevent selection
by them. At the same time the committed latch is set,
the SELECT crosspoint line to that node will become
active and GATE BUS OUT will be the response to the
selecting tape controL The BUS OUT and BUS IN
connection has now been established between the tape
control and tape unit. SWITCH SELECT is not required
to select a tape unit, although it is always active in
3803 subsystems.
Device Operating Interface A and B (2 lines): A device
operating line is active when a committed tape unit
(one for which a COMMITIED latch has been set) has
its BUSY /T ACH line active. The DEVICE OP INTF A
line to the tape control is used for generating the
METERING IN line for its channel interface. The
DEVICE OP INTF B line serves the same function but is
used by the second channel interface when the
Two-Channel Switch feature is installed.
Run Meter: When the node is enabled, the RUN
METER line is sent to the device for meter operation.
Set/Reset: The SET/RESET line is tied active so the
ENABLE/DISABLE latch can be set to the
corresponding state of the Enable/Disable switch on
the operator's paneL
Committed: Once the COMMITTED latch is set for a
given node, it remains set until reset by the selecting
tape controL Reset is accomplished by addressing and
sending a 50 ns pulse on the SET/RESET line.
Priority: When two or more tape controls attempt to
select a tape unit at the same time, priority of access is
determined by jumpers plugged on Tape Controls 1 and
2 (58-100). See Section 90 for plugging details_
Tape
Unit F
Tape control 2 switches are similar to
tape control 1, except section A directs
tape control 2's access to tape units 8-F.
Section B controls the access of tape'
control' to tape units a-F.
1
8
A
(!!II
B
Enable
,.
"Olsable . .
2
8
58-060
(J
o
('
'\I
,
/
"-~
(
(
c
(-,.
(
c c:
0"
(
"
(\ C
-~.'
(
1 •• .-"/
c
58-070
OPER-4x16 SWITCH LOGIC
Notes:
[1] The maximum switch configuration consists of 16
tape units and 4 tape controls.
[2] Tape units attach only to the tape controls with
device switching features.
[3] Any or all tape controls may have a Two-Channel
Switch feature.
r
Tape Control 4 - - - - - - - - ,
I
Communicator 2 Feature
I
I
I
Secondary
Primary
I
Interface
Interface
"
I
L ----
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--------r----..J
- Tape Control 1 - - - - - - - - -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Communicator 1 Feature
Addresses Jumpered 0.7
Secondary
Interface
I
l
1
I
,
BO- B7
00- 07
I
I
I
I
I
I
A
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Il __
B
I
I
I
C
D
1
r Tape Control 3 - - - - - - - - -
I
I
I
Communicator 2 Feature
I
I
I
I
I
Secondary
Primary
I
I
Interface
Interface
IL ________________ ....II
J
.- Tape Control
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
---------
Communicator 1 Feature
Addresses Jumpered 8-F
Secondary
Interface
I
Primary
Interface
I
:
I
I
A
B
I
C
D
TU Online/Offline Switches
Crosspoint SWitches
Crosspoint Switches
I
1 1
I
1
Tape
Unit 7
I
f
t
AO- A7
CO -C7
BO - B7
00- 07
I Ij I I
i
------------- --
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TU Online/Offline Switches
II I I I I I
Tape
Unit 0
«'
I
I
I
CO-C7
I
I
I
I
Primary
Interface
I
I
I
I
AO- A7
I
I
I
I
J
-- r-------------Tape
Unit 8
-~
Tape
Unit F
58-070
Copyright International Business MachInes CorporatIOn 1976, 1979
58-080
OPER-2x8 SWITCHING FUNCTIONAL UNITS
r- Device Switching Functional Units-
Functional Units of the Device Switch are:
•
(All reside in TCU·1 )
Logic Section: The logic section communicates
with the tape control to provide status, device
address, and accessing interlocks. The information
exchanged establishes tape unit attachment to the
tape control and presents switch status to the
operating tape control or controls in the subsystem
configuration.
•
Crosspoint Section: The crosspoint section is a
switch matrix capable of switching twelve inbound
and twelve outbound lines. Each node (tape
control/tape unit path) is controlled by the logic
section.
•
Communicator: The communicator replaces the
selection logic circuits and associated device
interface cabling in the basic tape control with
different logic circuits and cabling to the device
switches. The communicator divides the device
interface into primary and secondary and controls
the gating of each according to the address of the
device being selected. The communicator consists
of interface drivers and receivers.
1-------I
IITU Online! Offline
SWitches (0· 7)
58·060
Tape Unit Online/Offline Switches: Tape unit
toggle switches (58-060, 58-100) are located on the
operator's panel of each tape control having a
device switch feature. These switches enable the
operator to determine tape unit availability to each
tape control in the configuration. In a 4x16
configuration, four tape controls can access 16
tape units so there are 64 toggle switches, 32 each
on Tape Controls 1 and 2. There are no switches
in Tape Controls 3 and 4.
.
Note: . , . , . , . , . , . , •
ALD XC-7oo pages.
'"
'"u
_~:c
I
I:
Bus In Lines (9)
'" '"
-'"
'"c:~
- -
0
.,
>-~
: 'c'"
:>
I EE
. u
~
Present Switch Status
'" 0
'0.0
c:
CD
>-
:u
'"u '"'"
E
~
Metering, Enable Disable SWitches, AddreSSing,
Self,ct Signals, CU Power Off, Interface B Sele~ted (TCS)
•
~
Committed
'--------- - - - - I
1111
Bus and Tag Out Lines (12)
'"
'S',)
E
C
::l
E
0
u
~
.
I
I
.I
0
__Bus In Lines (9)
.
I
,>-
:0
Present Switch Status
E
E)
I
-.
Device End, Busy/Tach
(From Selected Crosspoint)
"
I
/
, .... "
Metering, Enable/Disable Switches,
Addressing, Sele'ct Signals, CU Power
Off, Interface B Selected (TCS)
,
.
External signal cable from
TU 2, Primary Interface
TCU-l 'B' Switch section
I
.J
-
I
I
0
..
I
CrossPOint Switches
"Outbound"
58-090
-
-
I
I
0
Crosspoint SWitches
"Inbound"
58-090
I
I
I
IGate Bus Out
CD
CD
•
Logic Section
58-090
•
-
I
I
0
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
-------- -
- -
'-.
- -
- -
58-080
Copyright International Bus_iness Machines Corporation 1976. ,.979
o o
I
I,
L
o
I
I
Committed
I
(e
T
I
0
/F
refer to charts located in
e
~
&
u
II
- -
I
~c:
•
Metering
Tape Unit 0
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
Logic Section
58·090
CD
0.
__
~c:z
(5
•
•
_ Device End, Busy/Tach
t~
._ ~ 0
en<.l
I
I
Gate Bus Out
End, Busy Tach (From Selected Crosspoint)
~~::l
Tape Control Unit 2
(TCU - 2), (Also
identified as C,U,
O·
'" c:
1
~
Bus In Lines (9)
0
U)::::
I
I
-e-
L
I
I
~
Devll~e
1
-
0
ou ~
'"
18
I
I
-
58·090
Crosspoint Switches
·'Inbound"
58·090
~
-'0
Bus and Tag Out Lines (12)
II Crosspoint
Switches
"Outbound"
~
IE
Tape Control Unit 1
(TCU·l) (Also
identified as C,U,
'A',) (Hosts TUO-7)
0
Bus and Tag Out Lines (12)
L-------1
The Communicator 1 feature has only one external
(primary) interface. The Communicator 2 feature has
two external interfaces (primary and secondary). The
secondary interface connects attached tape units·
through Switch Section A (58-055, 58-060). The
primary interface connects a 3803 that does not have
tape units attached to another tape control through
Switch Section B.
•
II
00
Cj ()'.
\...
o
."
..f
'~)
;-
-
'"
/-""\
,
"
C"
c
(~-
(~
(
c
58-090
OPER-DEVICE SWITCH NODE
r------------------------------------------~
Gating a control unit to device path node on or off
effects switching at the device interface level.
58 -080
Each node consists of parts of three logic cards. The
crosspoint cards (B) contain the electronic switches
needed to switch the bus in or bus out lines for a
node. The switch logic card (A) contains the circuitry to
control the crosspoint switch and communications to
the tape controls.
Outbound
:
BUS OUT TO DEVICE 0
BUS OUT FROM TC A
XPT
Switch
.. The crosspoint (XPT) switches are gated by the set
to the COMMITTED latch.
II
COMMITTED lines prevent simultaneous selection
of the same device by more than one tape control.
II
INTERFACE COMMITTED, COMMITTED, and
DEVICE BUSY are ANDed to generate DEVICE
OPERATIONAL, which is sent to the tape control to
develop METER IN for the channel interface.
..
•
Inbound
BUSINTOTCA
BUS IN FROM DEVICE 0
XPT
Switch
~
58 - 110
SELECT XPT DRIVE
L ~- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - r
rosspoint Switch
DEVICE END INTERRUPT lines are scanned by the
tape control to determine which tape unit has a
DEVICE END INTERRUPT pending.
- - -
-. - - - -
-
I
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
58·080
I
I
0
BUSY IT ACH is available to the tape control when
the node is selected and enabled and the DEVICE
BUSY or SWITCH BUSY line is inactive.
DEVICE SEL
AND ADDRESS
DECODED
Committed
l
COMMITTED CU A
GATE BUS OUT
(To communicator that
addressed this switch)
.~
SWITCH BUSY
J
II
II
DEVICE OP INTF B
A
FL
A
TC ENABLED
AND POWER
Interface B
Committed
•
i--
DEVICE OP INTF A
A
INTERFACE B
SELECTED
1 Node Configuration
r -,- I
10le l
Tape Control A
L
_1_
-.J
Tape Control C
BUSY! TACHOMETER
A
OR
SELECTED-ADDRESSENABLED
Tape Control D
Device
A
•
DEVICE BUSY!
TACHOMETER
Tape Control B
'--
FL
o
2
3
4
5
6
7
II
A
DEVICE END INTERRUPT
OR
DEVICE END INTERRUPT
I
Switch Logic Card
LSe:"F~5~-1~~r~ta~: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
.J
58-090
<0 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
(
(
(
(
(-/
(
<=
(
(-'
./
('"
(:~'
('"
('
c'
( "'"
/
OPER-INBOUND CROSSPOINT SWITCH
C'
58-110
TU5 P
H
r---
GATE BUS OUT/SEL XPT 5
(
)
N
From Switch Logic Card
BUS IN 0 TU 0-4, 6, 7
(
H
XPT Switch
'--
DOTOR
(
)
BUS IN PTU5
TU5 4, 5, 6,7
..--
H
N
i...--
BUS IN 1
TU 0-4, 6,7.
,
(
)
1
XPT Switch
H
DOT OR
(
)
BUS IN 4-7 TU5
.-G02
N
L...-
STATUS, DATA
and CONTROL
1
TU50,1,2,3,
24Q
P05 BUS IN 0 TU5
-BUS IN 0 TU5
J04
M07 BUS IN 1 TU5
-BUS IN 1 TU5
J07
ENTR
P04 BUS IN 2 TU5
(
)
XPT Switch
-BUS IN 2 TU5
J03
-BUS IN 3 TU5
G10
P06 BUS IN 3 TU5
From Device 5
XA11-1
See Note
Note: See ALD pages XCnnn.
DOT OR
XB103 B3H2
See Note
BUS IN 2
TU 0-4, 6, 7,
BUS IN 3 TUO
BUS IN 3 TU1
BUS IN 3 TU2
BUS IN 3 TU3
BUS IN 3 TU4
BUS IN 3 TU5
BUS IN 3 TU6
BUS IN 3 TU7
013 -CU 6 BUS IN 3
DOTOR
XB105
See Note
58-110
(~
58-111
NOTES:
3803-2/3420
58-111
(!) Copyright InternatIOnal Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
o o o
00
o o o
,
~
/1:"""'~,
1'" -""'
'-~
'-
~
0
(~
',,~
_.
__
...
----
c
(
c
(~
REF-CE PANEL
3803 CE PANEL DESCRIPTION
Off
r----------------------------.--------------,
Degates the following functions:
Panel
~
Panel
Enabled
Intf's
Disabled
~Iow
Data
Lo I C Hi I C
Pty
Pty
Stop On
~
Stop On MT E Env Skew Read
~
VRC
BOCB Busu
Low Hi 0 BusP
Pw
pgm ROS Regpty
Comp
Cmpr
Equal
g
Displav Select
r -_ _
CE Reg
ROS Mode
Rst/Cmpr
Rst/Err
Device ._ _ __
cg
0
1
2
3
4
©©cQ~
5
ROS Address
Set IC
Bus In
Data All) 1-Chan ALU 2-Device
Norm
Bus Out
_P_ _D_a_ta_.L\.:~.2~~':':'~_L_U_2_-[).:~:e
Hi ROS
Step
Low ROS
Cycle
Set ' - - - - -
Aiif
~~Y'
6
7
Ig~y~~
IC
Stop
8
9
10
2.
Stop On-Data Flow Check
3.
Reset/ Start or Step
4.
ROS Mode
5.
Command Control switches (3)
STOP ON-CONTROL CHECK (TWO-POSITION
TOGGLE)
11
:~~yggg
Stop On
PROS Data Bits 0-7
_P_ _R_O_S Data Bits 8·15
Serv 1 Sta 1
Adr 1
OP 1 ALU
Device Address
._.ALU
Serv OSup U Ad' 0 Cmmd OALU
Sel
Cmmd Ctrl . Move
ALU
Reg
Sup
CU
~Ref!_ _ B.!'L-ALU
Heg
SLip
Hold ALU
In I:l
R.e.g
Intf
.
1
2
1
2'
1
1
Data Entry Select
Cmpr Reg
Start
Note: If the Panel Enabled light does not light. set the
ROS Mode rotary switch to Norm and operate the Set
ROS Mode switch (momentary).
PANEL ENABLE (TWO-POSITION TOGGLE)
Panel
On
~
Allows the CE panel functions identified by yellow
letteting to be performed with the Interface Disabled
light either on or off_
Active only if ROS is in normal mode. It may be
necessary to raise the Set ROS Mode momentary
switch to establish this mode_ The Panel Enabled light
is ON when the switch is ON.
Active only while ROS is in Stop mode.
Stops both ALUs when any control check is recognized
in the ALU selected by the ALU1 / ALU2 switch. The
exact stopping location depends on the type of error; it
is usually two less than the stop address except for a
BOC. Generally, microprogram-detected errors will not
be recognized until a transfer hardware error (XFR
HDWERR) microinstruction is executed. Most other
errors will stop the ALUs when the failure occurs.
ii@
CE PANEL SWITCHES
®
On
ALU 2 CE/Cmpr
Command Controls
Wr Data Single
Stop On-Control Check
__
_
p
RESETISTART OR STEP (TWO-POSITION
MOMENTARY TOGGLE)
Wr Tgr u pgm
LRC ECCSkewReadCRCWr upgm
VRC
Tgr
Command
1.
Compare Register
..._._---- ..
.... _ - - - -
Cinpr R<>9
75-001
Reset
Check
~gggggQg I!!Jgg\Q)(~(Q)Q(g
Reset
Start or Step
Control Check
c'
(~
Allows all CE panel functions to be performed with the
Interface Disabled light On.
Disables the compare register equal features of the
ROS Mode switch Stop position.
Off
Allows normal tape control operation.
Start or Step
Active only while the Panel Enabled light is On.
Reset (UP)
Sets both ALUs to Instruction Counter (lC) address 000
and causes a Power-on Reset Branch Condition.
Start or Step (Down)
Starts both ALUs after a stop condition, with
subsequent running of the ALUs controlled by the ROS
Mode switch. Also resets the Compare Equal light at
any time without interlocks.
STOP ON-DATA FLOW CHECK
(TWO-POSITION TOGGLE)
Stop On
®
Active only while Interface Disabled light is On (CE
Mode).
On
Stops both ALUs at the completion of a command in
which !:l failure occurs on Unit Check condition.
Off
Normal tape control operation.
Note: When in CE Mode, the tape control stops on
Unit Exception, regardless of switch position. To inhibit
a Stop-On-Unit-Exception when tape control is in CE
Mode, jumper AA1T2J12 to ground.
75-001
REF-CE PANEL (Cont'd)
LAMP TEST (TWO-POSITION TOGGLE)
Lamp Test
@
Allows you to test the CE panel indicator lights.
ROS MODE (SEVEN-POSITION ROTARY)
ROS Mode
Rst Cmpr
Stop
Set ROS Mode
When the data in the compare register equals the IC
address of the ALU selected by the ALU1 / ALU2
switch, and the Display Select switch is in IC position,
both ALUs are stopped. The instructions at the
stopped addresses will not have been executed.
Sets the selected ROS mode.
DISPLAY SELECT (SEVEN-POSITION ROTARY)
Display Slect
CE Reg
Set CE/Compr
Cmpr Reg
Sets the data, selected by the three hex rotary switches
into the register selected by the Data Entry Select
switch. The Set CE/Compr switch operates without the
panel enabled or the interface disabled.
When the Stop On-Control Check switch is active, both
ALUs are stopped only when an error occurs in the
ALU selected by the ALU1 / ALU2 switch.
IC
Bus In
Bus Out
Rst Err
Set
75-002
COMMAND CONTROLS
Note: If compare equal stop function does not work,
make sure the Control Check Stop switch is off.
rc-
Norm
Stop
i~@
Step
Step
Cycle
Active only while the Panel Enabled light is On. After
selecting any of the seven positions of the ROS Mode
switch, activate the Set ROS Mode momentary toggle
switch to set the mode.
Rst/Cmpr
When the IC address of the selected ALU equals the
data in the compare register, both ALUs are reset to
location 000 and allowed to continue running. (The
Display Select switch must be in IC position.)
Hi ROS
Command Controls
CE Reg
Operating the Start or Step momentary switch allows
stepping the ALU selected by the ALU1 / ALU2 switch,
while the ALU not selected runs normally.
Active only while the Intf's Disabled light is on.
Cycle
Ripple/Wr Data
Allows the repetitive execution of an instruction at a
selected address. Step or stop at the instruction address on which you want to cycle. Set ROS Mode to
Cycle and press Start or Stop.
Establishes the data pattern mode for offline write
commands.
ALU1/ALU2 (TWO-POSITION TOGGLE)
MPLE allows continuous cycling of the four commands
entered with the Data Entry Select switch ..
Data
Single
Start
Allows the contents of the compare register to set IC
of the ALU selected by the ALU1 / ALU2 switch.
Norm
Normal running condition of both ALUs.
2.
Displays Write Data/Go Down or Byte Ct/Multiplier
in conjunction with Data Entry Select.
Note: Some stop-on-error conditions stop the CE
clock, which prevents displaying the contents of the CE
registers.
Cmpr Reg
Displays data currently in the compare register in
indicators 0 through 11.
SINGLE allows single stepping of the four commands
with each activation of the momentary Start switch.
Set IC
Displays command / device in conjunction with Data
Entry Select.
Mple/Single
Rst/Err
When a control check occurs, both ALUs are reset to
location 000 and allowed to continue running.
1.
IC
ALU2
Displays the IC address of the selected ALU in
indicators 0 through 11.
Stop/Start
Selects the ALU to be controlled by the ROS Mode
switch.
STOP halts the continuous cycling of the four
commands when the Mple/Single switch is in the
MPLE position.
Selects the ALU when the Display Select switch is set
to the IC, Bus In, Bus Out, Hi ROS, or Low ROS
position.
Bus In
With ALU1 selected, displays Channel Bus In data in
indicators 0 through 7 and In Tags in indicators 8
through 11.
START initiates the commands stored in the CE
command registers.
SET ROS MODE/SET CE COMPR
(TWO-POSITION MOMENTARY TOGGLE)
With ALU2 selected, displays TU Bus In data in
indicators 0 through 7 and the device address in
indicators 8 through 11.
Set
~'.
CE/Cmpr
75-002
o
()
()
o
o
/)
;'
\,
'\
,/
"
"
~\
\" ;,
C)
()
r,,\
"-
y
I
0
?
/-'1
'--)
(~
'- ,)
,"
'1
;
.'
~-~~~~--~-~~~~-----------
(~
(
(~
75-003
REF-CE PANEL (Cont'd)
Bus Out
Cmnd 1,2,3, and 4
With ALU1 selected, displays Channel Bus Out data in
7, and outbound control or tags in 8 through
11. Parity is only assured when the microprogram
activates CHANNEL BUS OUT.
With the Data Entry Select switch in one of the four
positions (Cmnd 1, 2, 3, or 4). a command and its
associated device address (O-F) may be entered into
one of the four command positions.
o through
To write continuously, jumper from AA 1R2J12 to
ground.
Control Check
•
To do an LWR with go-down time, jumper from
AA 1S2G08 to ground.
Data Entry
With ALU2 selected, displays TU Bus Out data in 0
through 7 and outbound controls or tags in 8
through 11.
Byte Cnt
HiROS
With ALU1 selected, displays ROS1 data bits 0-/ P1 in
7 and control lines in 9 through 11.
o through
With ALU2 selected, displays ROS2 data bits 0-7 P1 in
7 only.
o through
Low ROS
The three Data Entry switch positions determine the
total byte count. The left and center switches count to
a maximum of 256. The right, or Multiplier switch
counts in multiples of 1024. Position zero of the
Multiplier switch adds zero to the total of the other two
switches. Position 1 would add 1024, 2 would add
2048, etc. To provide a byte count of 3140, set the left
and center switches each to 4, and set the right switch
to 3.
,
The three rotary switches are used to enter data into
various registers. Set a command into the left switch
and the TU address into the right switch. For example,
01 A entered into the Command register indicates a
write command to device A.
Command
8
9
10
11
©(Q)©©
With ALU1 selected, displays ROS1 data bits 8-15 P2
in 0 through 7 and control lines in 9 through 11.
With ALU2 selected, displays ROS2 data bits 8-15 P2
in 0 through 7 only.
DATA ENTRY SELECT (SEVEN-POSITION
ROTARY)
Data Entry Sleet
~Cmpr Reg
Cmnd 1
Cmnd 2~
Cmnd 3
Cmnd 4
Byte Cnt
Cmpr Reg
Allows data in the three Data Entry switches to be
entered in the compare register.
Byte Count
Written
00 to FE
Byte Count dialed +3
FF
2
CE PANEL INDICATORS
Write Data Go Down
Write Data and Go Down determine those bits to be
written and establishes the go-down time. The left and
center data entry switches determine the bits to be
written. For example, the Ripple/Wr Data switch in Wr
Data, 8 in the left switch, and 3 in the center switch
writes the following:
o
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10000011
Note: The P bit is automatically generated when
required.
The right switch determines the go-down time.
Position zero gives a go-down of 6.0 milliseconds. The
total range is from 6.0 milliseconds to approximately
0.5 second. Each position, 0 to F, represents
approximately 26 milliseconds. A setting of 3 results in
a go-down time of 6 milliseconds + (3 x 26)' or
approximately 84 milliseconds.
Lo IC Hi
Ie
@oooo©oo
BOC B Bus u
Low Hi 0 Bus
Ptv Pgm ROS Reg pry
BOC
Checks the 16 branch conditions not checked by the HI
IC PARITY/HI ROS register circuits. (A total of 32
BOCs are checked.) If an even number of BOC groups
are active, a BOC error is indicated.
Checks the output of an LSR for odd parity on the B
Bus on instructions whi,ch transfer data from ALU to an
external register. If parity is even, the error is gated to
the hardware error latches and CE panel indicator.
Device
Byte Count
Dialed
Stop On
B-Bus Parity
Note: Check to ensure you get the correct byte count.
Compare Rgeister '
CONTROL CHECK INDICATORS
INTF'S DISABLED
Intf·s
Disabled
Note: When displaying the LSRs, B-Bus parity errors
can occur because LSRs are not set to odd parity with
power-on reset.
Hi IC Pty/Hi ROS Reg Pty
The circuits that set this indicator are:
1.
Hi IC parity check.
2.
Hi ROS register parity check.
Indicates when the tape control is offline. The manual
Enable/Disable switch(es) on the CU operator's panel
must be in Disabled position before the lamp comes
on.
3.
Instruction Decode error. (ROS instruction check to
be sure only one ROS operation was decoded.)
4.
BOC Error. (Check of 16 branch conditions.)
CMPR EQUAL
Lo IC Pty/Low ROS Reg Pty
Cmpr
Equal
(Q)
Indicates that the data entered in the CE/Compare
register equals that contained in any register selected
for comparison.
Checks parity of the IC (low order) and ROS register
(low order). An even parity error sets the HARDWARE
ERROR latch and CE panel indicator. Lo IC Parity is
checked only on a BU or a successful BOC. Low ROS
Parity is checked on every instruction cycle.
75-003
REF-CE PANEL (Cont'd)
o Bus
Pty
75-004
6.
Checks the parity of information to be stored in an LSR
at 100 ns time. Bits 0-8 from the D Bus are
exclusive-ORed with the P bit from Bus Out. Even
parity sets the D BUS PARITY ERROR latch and
HARDWARE ERROR 5 latch, and lights the CE panel
indicator. This error condition is only checked on a
transfer of data into the ALU from an external source.
7.
8.
U Pgm
Monitors the selected ALU and signals an error when
the ALU detects any hardware error, including checkout
errors for both ALUs.
Data Flow Check Indicators
Data Flow Check
Parity does not match between the channel buffer
and the. write buffer outputs on write operations.
Skew Error is set:
When operating in 7-track data convert mode and
a count of bits before and after conversion does
not match.
When operating in 7-track mode with the Data
Converter off and the count of bits for each byte
as it enters and leaves the register fails to
compare.
During a 6250 bpi/PE read operation if RIC leads
ROC by 30· bits.
2.
During a 6250 bpi write operation if RIC leads ROC
by 14 bits.
3.
During a PE write operation if RIC leads ROC by 4
bits.
4.
During a NRZI write operation by skew gate.
MTE/LRC
Read VRC
1.
1.
2.
3.
Set during a 6250 bpi write operation when there
are two or more error pointers:
b. Set during a write operation if hardware pointer
and correction code indicate different tracks.
Set during a N RZI operation when a block has an
odd number of bits in any track (LRC).
2.
ENV/ECC
Set when any track signal falls below threshold on
read or write. Does not set Data Check.
2.
Set during a PE operation when any error pointer is
set or when any track falls below threshold. Sets
Data Check on write only.
3.
Set during a NRZI write operation if NRZI Register
2 has incorrect parity.
P Comp
The P Comp indicator (also C Compare) is set by the
following conditions:
1.
When parity of the byte sent to the channel buffer
on read operations is wrong.
2.
Buffer Overrun.
3.
Write Address error.
4.
If CHANNEL BUFFER READ IN counter gets out of
step.
5.
Write buffers are empty when a write tape cycle
occurs.
6250 bpi Mode
a. Set during single-track error correction if a
match is not found:
Set during a PE operation when there are two or
more error pointers.
1.
NOTES ON CE PANEL OPERATION
1.
Set during a PE operati()n if a parity error occurs
and no track pointers are on.
CRC
Set during 6250 bpi and 9-track NRZI operations when
the CRC byte calculated for a read operation does not
match the CRC byte written on tape.
Wr Tgr
Set when the output of the write triggers has incorrect
parity.
•
A Start I/O command to a tape unit that has Unit
Check or Busy in its initial status byte will prevent
stepping to the next command. This condition can
be caused by a Not Ready tape unit.
CE command sequence hang up: when an error
occurs on a 3803 with the Two-Channel Switch
(TCS) feature installed, a "contingent connection"
is established without Stop On Error ON. This is
caused by dedicated sense data from the failing
tape unit. There are three ways to proceed:
1. Issue a Sense command to the same tape unit
after any other type of command.
2. Issue all four internal program commands,
except a Test I/O or NOP, to the same tape unit.
A Mode Set command can also cause a hang
condition, so it may be necessary to replace this
command following initial setup.
3. In order to allow command cycling to mUltiple
tape units without changing the command setup,
set ROS Mode to Rst/Cmpr using IC address
302 on ALU1. This restarts both microcodes at
000 on contingent-connection conditions and
performs a general reset. To eliminate the need
for pressing the CE Command Start pushbutton,
connect a jumper from AB2Q2S10 (General
Reset FC041) to AA 1T2G05 (Start Key Latch
PK035).
Skew
U Pgm
Set when vertical misalignment of bits exceeds
acceptable limits. (If all bits in a byte are not received
by the read circuits within a specified period, the bit
has excessive "skew" and Skew Error is set.)
Set when ALU2 detects any microprogram error,
including End Data Check on PE operations, and any
error indicated in sense byte 8, bits 0-6; sense byte 9,
bit 1; and sense byte 10, bits 0-7.
75-004
r~'\
(~'\
/--.",
~
'~
''"'-
/
0 () 0 0 0 0 () C)
0
~j
0
~
~~
~
If
,
,:.I'
"".~\
r
/"
\.
"-
"
-?
./''''
)
',,---
,.
rC")
"- _/
.f"",,\
\-.../
r-"\
,
,~
;)
(~
(~\
\-...J
\.)
-----------,-
(
(~
(--
('--
(~
(~'
(:
C
80-000
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
The tools and test equipment listed in this section are
required to properly service 3420 Magnetic Tape Units
and 3803 Tape Controls.
KEPT AT THE CUSTOMER'S ACCOUNT
Part
453511
KEPT AT THE BRANCH OFFICE
Tape Transport Cleaner
Scratch tape
Name
Part
Name
MASTER TAPES
3.
Command 3-Read Forward ('02')
Master skew tapes and master signal-level tapes are
manufactured to rigid specifications. They are the
standards that are used by CEs to obtain optimum tape
unit performance.
4.
Command 4-Read Backward ('OC')
Oscilloscope (Model 453. 454. 561. 545. 766H or
equivalent)
Because tape unit performance is directly affected by
the accuracy of these master tapes, the following
precautions should be taken:
Use master tapes only for their intended purpose.
1848621
Stress Tape (order from Mechanicsburg)
352465
Tape Cleaning Kit
1.
432152
Master Signal-Level Tape (order through IRD Sales)
(See Note 1.)
432641
Master Skew Tape (See Note 1.)
2.
Handle tapes with care.
451064
Degausser (See Note 1.)
453500
Manometer. 30 inch (two needed for series
3.
Make only full-reel passes in order to have even
wear throughout the length of the tape.
453522
Developing Solution
4.
Identify master tapes as such and mark the reels
with the letter "m," as a reminder to make full
passes only.
connection) (See Notes 1 and 2.)
453504
Tee and Hose Assembly (See Note 2.)
may be used if available)
453522
Tape Developing Solution
460874
Scale. 0 to 6 pounds (belt adjustment)
1765342
Tape Unit Tester
2515376
Capstan Prealignment Gauge
1846251
Shim. Right Reel Hub Alignment
MASTER SKEW TAPES
2515390
Capstan Adjustment Wrench (rear adjustments)
1846252
Hex Wrench. Right Reel Hub
2515401
Reel Motor and Hub Adjustment Tools: (see 08-460)
2512745
Adapter Hose (See Note 2.)
2523723
Capstan Adjustment Wrench (front adjustments)
2513154
Pressure Divider (See Note 2.)
5861448
7-Track NRZI Threshold Adjustment Card
2501611
Tape Unit Cleaning Brush
5861455
PE Threshold Adjustment Card
2512063
Crimper (supplied by marketing representative)
Master skew tapes have a density of 800 FCI and are
written with one solid bit across the width of the tape.
These tapes are written on a specially adapted tape
unit at the Tape Test Center with accuracy held to
within 0.375 usec total skew between the leading and
lagging bits of a 112 ips tape unit.
5861452
Dual Density Threshold Adjustment Card
2515390
Capstan Box Wrench (read adjustment capstan only)
1848621
6250 bpi Stress Tape
453585
*Digitec 251 Meter (Digitec 201 Meter. PIN 453046.
• Trademark of United Systems Corporation
Notes:
1. Discussed in more detail in this section.
The master skew tape will run off the reel when
reading forward because it is written with no interblock
gaps (IBGs). In order to create an IBG and save time
during skew adjustments, make the following
alterations to the master skew tape:
The master skew tape will read forward to the end of
the reel. read backward, and repeat the cycle. This
permits checking skew from the rear of the tape unit
without manipulating the controls.
MASTER SIGNAL-LEVEL TAPES
Master signal-level tapes have the ability to produce a
signal to within ± 2 % of the primary master. (A
primary master, which is established as an IBM
standard, is the base for instrument alignment.)
All new master signal-level tapes are checked at 3200
FCI and 800 FCI. The suffix letter" A" is added to the
part number to allow field identification of
3200/800/556 FCI tapes as opposed to the former
800/556 FCI tapes. Thus, for example, a master
signal-level tape checked out at both 3200 FCI and 800
FCI would have Pt,N 432152A.
DEGAUSSER
Caution: The degausser will demagnitize any
material such as tape, disks, etc. Power off the
tape unit.
To degauss the read/write head:
1.
Remove magnetic tape from the tape unit. Do not
place the tape on top of the tape unit.
2.
Plug degausser into 110 Vac receptacle.
3.
Press the pushbutton on the degausser while it is
at I,east 1 foot (30,5 em) away from the read/write
head and move it slowly toward the head.
1.
Read the master skew tape forward to the end of
tape EDT reflective marker.
2.
Install a write enable ring.
3.
Write one record of any size beyond the EDT
marker.
4.
Hold the degausser against the front surface of the
head for about 10 seconds.
4.
Remove the write enable ring.
5.
5.
Rewind the tape;
Pull the degausser straight away from the head
very slowly to a distance of at least 1 foot (30,5
em) and release the pushbutton.
2. Not needed if p;essure/vacuum gauge P/N 5495384 is
available.
After the preceding one-time preparatory steps, set the
tape control CE panel as follows when you use the
skew tape:
1.
,2.
Command 1-Read Forward ('02')
Command 2-Read Backward ('OC')
80-000
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980. 1983
80-010
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
WATER MANOMETER
Connect the pressure-sensing hose to one port,
leaving the other port open.
Note: The use of a 30 inch (76,20 em) manometer
or the 80 inch (203,20 em) pressure/vacuum gauge
is not dependent on the English (metric) system of
measurement.
3.
Use the requested tool by part number and name, and
measure to the specified units (whether metric or
English) to obtain the desired adjustment or reading.
Shown are several setups for using the water
manometer, part number 453500. Part A shows a
single manometer measuring a pressure of less than 30
inches (76,20 em). Part B shows two manometers in
series measuring a pressure between 30 and 60 inches
(76,20 em and 152,90 em). Part C shows using the
pressure divider and a single manometer measuring a
pressure greater than 30 inches (76,20 em).
General instructions for using the manometer are:
4.
5.
Fill the water manometer with tap water,
maintaining the water level near the 0 position on
the scale. Zero the manometer by sliding the scale
up or down until the 0 mark lines up within 0.2
inch (5,7 mm) of the bottom of the meniscus in
both columns.
II
Set conditions for the specific item to be checked
according to the pneumatic-adjustment decal
located on the transfer valve and manifold.
Read the vacuum level. (The vacuum level is the
sum of the displacement of the water level in each
column.)
PROCEDURES
Note: Take readings at bottom of meniscus.
1.
Remove the tee from the tee and hose assembly,
and connect the hose on the line to be checked.
2.
Set up the water manometer by opening both top
valves one full turn from closed position. (Incorrect
readings will occur if valves are opened too far.)
II
Using a single manometer to measure a pressure
of less than 30 inches (76,20 cm). Read at bottom
of each meniscus and add the two readings
together to get total pressure (W). W = 2.0 + 1.7
= 3.7.
To
To
Measurement
Port
Measurement
Port
II
Using two manometers in series to measure a
pressure between 30 and 60 inches (76,30 and
152,40 cm). Read at bottom of each meniscus and
add the four readings together to get total pressure
(the sum of X + V). X + Y = 2.0 + 1.7 + 2.0 +
1.7 = 7.4 inches.
Using a pressure divider with a single manometer
to measure a pressure of greater than 30 inches
(76,30). First, measure a known pressure of less
than 30 inches. Second, insert the divider and
adjust the divider's adjusting screw until the
manometer reading is 40% of its original reading.
Third, measure the pressure of greater than 30
inches by reading at the bottom of each meniscus,
adding the two readings together (to get Z), and
mUltiplying Z by 2.5 to get pressure. 2.5Z = 2.5(2.0
+ 1.7) = 2.5(3.7) = 9.25 inches. The maximum
reading possible with this combination is 75 inches
(190,50 em).
Using a pressure/vacuum gauge to measure a
pressure greater than 80 inches (203,20 em).
a. Measure a known pressure less than 80 inches
(203,20 cm).
r
b. Insert the pressure divider between the
measurement part and the gauge and adjust the
divider's adjusting screw until the gauge reads
40% of its original reading.
c. Measure the pressure greater than 80 inches
(203,20 cm) and record the reading (Z).
d. Multiply Z by 2.5 to get the total pressure.
Example: If Z reading is 33.2, 33.2 x 2.5
= 83.0
inches
PRESSURE/VACUUM GAUGE
Shown below is pressure/vacuum gauge, part 5495384.
To use the gauge:
1. Attach the gauge hose to the fitting to be tested.
2. Read the dial directly in pressure or vacuum. (For
measurements above 80 inches (203,20 em), add 1
inch (2,54 cm)to the reading for each 1/16 inch (1,59
mm) of pointer travel beyond the end of the scale.)
Caution: Disconnect from test point before
loading or unloading tape unit to prevent
damage or miscalibration of gauge.
Adjusting Screw
30-inch
Manometer,
Part 453500
30-inch
Manometer,
Part 453500
30-inch
Manometer,
Part 453500
30-inch
Manometer,
Part 453500
tI
II
(To measurement port)
Part B
Part A
Part C
U
~~C~U~l';':;~~
(51 + 43 mm)
Wate<
II
Pressure/Vacuum Gauge
Part 5495384
80-010
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980. 1983
/""\
(~
(
C (-
(
--
(
...
(
(/
c
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
80-020
3420 FIELD TESTER
To use the field tester:
Caution: Use extreme care when attaching the field
tester because an error can damage the tape unit,
the tester, or both. Be sure to use only the 3420
field tester, part 1765342, when doing offline
maintenance on 3420 tape units. Do not use the
2420 Field Tester. When testing Models 4, 6, and 8,
a field tester at EC level 734316 must be used. A
temporary jumper must be installed from K2P02 to
M2D06 for 6250 operation.
1.
Unload the tape unit.
2.
Switch the unit off line at the logic gate. To ensure
that the on-off line switch circuitry is operating
correctly, monitor the - interface disable and + int
dis or - off lines. Refer to page FT910 of the 3420
ALDS. Check the following levels for proper
operation of the on-off line switch circuits.
When operated with the field tester, the tape unit loads
and unloads tape, reads, writes, and moves tape
forward or backward.
To test several tape units simultaneously, use the
manual controls on the tape control CE panel.
3.
Caution: The field tester can cause tape dump
and damage under the following conditions:
Position of On-Offline SW
A1L6D04
A1L6B03
Online
+6v
-4v
Offline
Gnd
Gnd
With the arrow on the cable pointing up, plug the
tester into the wiring side of the logic gate at
location A 1N5. Another way to be sure the cable is
plugged correctly is to make sure the notches on
the cable connector are toward the center of the
logic gate. Select, on the tape unit operator's
panel, comes on when the Read/Write switch is in
the READ position, or in the WRITE position with
the MOVE tag active. You can now use the tester
switches to load and Ready the tape unit.
1. When moving tape with field tester, the direction
switch position is changed before activating
"Stop".
time. Use the Dn/Bkwd control and Slow/Fast switch
to adjust go-down time. Go ensures continuous tape
movement. Use the Alt Dir/Fwd/Bkwd switch to
control direction. Stp halts tape motion.
Alt Dir/Fwd/Bkwd
2. When attached to a tape unit and set to "Fwd"
and either "St/Stop" or "Go", the tape unit is
loaded and goes to Load Point and becomes
Ready. If RESET on the tape unit console is
activated and the tape unit does not dump tape,
and then Reset is followed by activating
UNLOAD, the tape will run off the end of the
reel.
St/Stp/Go/Stop switch must be at Go to enable this
switch. Alt Dir is active in read status only; it moves
tape alternately forward and backward. Use Up/Fwd
control and Slow/Fast switch to adjust duration of
forward movement. Use On / Bkwd control and
Slow/Fast switch to adjust duration of backward
movement. Fwd causes forward tape motion. Bkwd
causes backward tape motion.
3. When using "AIt Dir", RESET is activated on the
tape unit.
Slow/Fast
Conditions 1, 2, and 3 above can be eliminated by
always putting the tester in "Stop" before doing
any other operation.
The switches on the tester operate the tape unit by
remote control as follows:
Start/Reset
Operates the same as the control on the tape unit
operator's panel. Start makes the unit ready. Reset
resets the unit.
Ld Rew/Rew Unld
Ld Rew loads tape if none is loaded, and rewinds tape
to load point if tape was loaded but is not at load point.
Rew Unld rewinds tape from any position, unloads the
unit, closes the cartridge if one is used, and lowers the
power window.
Up/Fwd
Up/Fwd controls either the time the MOVE line is
active during a start/stop operation, or the duration of
forward motion in an alternate-direction operation.
Dn/Bkwd
Dn/Bkwd controls either the time the MOVE line is
inactive during a start/stop operation, or the duration of
backward motion in an alternate-direction operation.
St/Stp/Go/Stop
This is a range switch for the Up/Fwd and Dn/Bkwd
controls. Slow extends the go-up/down timing range
to approximately 3.0 seconds. Fast decreases the
go-up/down timing range to approximately 7.0 ms.
. Write/Read
Write causes the tape unit to write with gaps. Each
time the tape unit writes, as in a start/stop operation, it
generates a PE gap of 0.528 inch (13,4 mm) and a GCR
gap of 0.275 inch (7,0 mm). Read causes continuous
reading.
8/16/32 (Models 3, 5, 7) See Note
This switch controls the frequency of the tester's write
oscillator. The three positions result in write frequencies
of 800 fci (NRZI), and 1600 and 3200 fci (PE),
respectively.
16/32/64 (Model 4, 6, 8) See Note
When a field tester at EC level 734316 is used on 3420
Models 4, 6, and 8 with the provided jumper installed.
these switch positions represent 1600, 3200, and 6400
fci as the label shows. Frequencies generated by the
tester are for practical offline test only. Do not confuse
these tester frequencies with normal online recording
densities.
Note: The back panel wiring on cable position A1N5 on
Models 4, 6, and 8 is such that the frequency of the tester is
doubled.
St/Stp causes interruptions in tape motion. Use the
Up/Fwd control and Slow/Fast switch to adjust go-up
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 19BO. 19B3
80-020
NOTES:
80-030'
3803-2/3420
© CO~,ri
ht Inter~~t,t~,al BUSi()ne
"Machines, cO,rporatio~n
7, 6, ,1979~80' 1983 ,
I '
",-y
"y
J
'
("")\"
"'0
•
I'.'
\,'
,()
\ '"
0 0
~
<~
C)
0
\J
() ()
",-",
'"
;;
\,
"
/'''\
;!
'"
:
./
/', ..
'"
~''\
"-
)
./
0
('~
(~""
0
•
I
",-j
r)
'-,
('~
(
d07~3~,.\
~
\.
"'- '
\,
j'
"-jI
/-:'-- ~~'"
(-
{
(~C:C('
(
85-000
SUBSYSTEM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Figure 1. IBM Tape Cleaning Kit
GENERAL CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS
This procedure makes all previous 3420 tape unit
cleaning procedures obsolete.
DAILY CLEANING PROCEDURE
Felt Pad Holder
PIN 352606
Cleaning Brush PIN 2513590
Items used by this procedure are contained in the IBM
Tape Cleaning Kit, part number 352465 (see Figure 1).
e N 68517811
Use IBM tape transport cleaner, part 8493001.
Performance results cannot be guaranteed when other
chemical formulations are used. Other chemical
formulations have not been tested by IBM, and their
use may impair performance or cause damage to the
tape unit or tape.
c
DANGER
When using tape cleaner, do not get it on skin or
clothing. Follow the instructions on the container.
Do not use metal instruments to clean any part of
the tape unit.
To promote reliable tape unit performance. all of the
steps listed below must be performed every eight
hours. Clean the tape unit in the sequence presented in
this section.
1.
Read/write and erase heads (see 85-001)
2.
Cleaner blade. BOT/EaT block, rewind plunger, and
threading channel reflector (see 85-002)
3.
Tape transport (see 85-003)
4.
Capstan (see 85-004)
5.
File reel hub (see 85-004)
Head Cleaning Brushes
Lint Free
Cloth
PIN 2108930
Cotton Swabs Must be Obtained Locally
and Must Have Wooden or Pressed Paper
Handles.
Felt Pad (54)
PIN 352605
#
"'-Dental Mirror
PIN 450126
©
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979, 1980, 1983
85-000
SUBSYSTEM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Cont'd)
TAPE UNIT CLEANING PROCEDURE FOR
3420 MODELS 3 THROUGH 8
1.
R/W AND ERASE HEADS
1.7 Use inspection mirror for Models 3, 5, and 7 or
dental mirror for Models 4, 6, and 8, to carefully
inspect heads, (Clean mirror with dry cloth, if
dirty.) If heads do not look clean, perform step 1.8,
otherwise wipe heads with dry clean cloth and go
to step 2.
1.1 Unload tape and remove from tape unit.
To remove stubborn residue from heads-
1.2 Open outerOand innerOdoors.
1.8 Use either style head cleaning brush dampened
with tape cleaner to remove residue
and then
return to step 1.3.
e
1.3 Dampen clean area of lint-free cloth with tape
cleaner.
1.4 When cleaning Models 3, 5, and 7, hold the
inspection mirror down, use dampened cloth to
clean the R/W and erase heads.using a circular
motion.
1.5 When cleaning Models 4, 6, and 8, hold
autocleaner in and clean the R/W and erase heads
.with a dampened cloth using a circular motion.
To reach the inside tracks, wrap the dampened
cloth around a cotton swab.
1.6 Repeat steps 1.3 and 1.4 or 1.5 until cloth remains
clean.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979, 1980, 1983
(-
(-
(-
(~~
('
(~
(=
(:~'
(~(~'
(~
(',
(~'
(~
("
(~\
C C'
(~
(~\
C (" (
85-002
SUBSYSTEM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Cont'd)
TAPE UNIT CLEANING PROCEDURE FOR
3420 MODELS 3 THROUGH 8
2.
CLEANER BLADE, BOT/EOT BLOCK,
REWIND PLUNGER, AND THREADING
CHANNEL REFLECTOR
2.1 Hold the inspection mirror down, or the
autocleaner in, when cleaning. Use a cotton swab
dampened with tape cleaner to clean the following
items.
2.2 Use the head cleaning brush (P/N 6851781)
dampened with tape cleaner to clean the cleaner
Wipe with cloth.
block
e.
2.1.1 BOT/EaT block.
2.1.2 Rewind plunger/filler block.
2.1.3 Threading channel reflector.
C Copyright
,nternation., Bullineu M.chin.. Corporation 1978, 1979. 1983
85-002
(;
- --
--
-~----
.. SUBSYSTEM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Cont'd)
85-003
-.:'/.'
TAPE UNIT CLEANING PROCEDURE FOR
3240 MODELS 3 THROUGH 8
3.3 Use a lint-free cloth dampened with tape cleaner to
clean the following:
e.
Back of inner door e.
3.3.1 Threading plates
3.
TAPE TRANSPORT
3.1 Install capstan cover
3.3.2
e.
3.3.3 Back wall. and sides
columns
3.3.4 Air bearings O. Note: If residue remains in
vacuum column corners. perform steps 3.3.5
and 3.3.6, otherwise go to step 3.4.
3.2 Dampen cotton swab with tape cleaner and clean
the following:
3.2.1 Front and back guides
CD of vacuum
G.
To remove stubborn residue in corners of vacuum
columns3.3.5 Put clean felt pad on handle making sure the
handle does not go through the Elnd of pad.
3.3.6 Dampen felt pad with tape cleaner and clean
Make
vacuum column corners as shown
sure no contact is made with capstan cover
and/or capstan.
e.
Caution: You may need to use water to remove
residue left in the vacuum columns by some tapes.
Do not get water on any other part of the machine.
Water will damage the capstan.
3.2.2 D-bearing
e.
3.3.7 Use a lint-free cloth dampened with tape
cleaner to remove any residue left by the felt
pad.
.
3.4 Check bottom of vacuum columns. for bits of
tape and remove if present.
3.5 Remove capstan cover and replace in storage area.
3803·1.2.3/3420
85-003
o
()
o
000
o
o
o
()
()
(~
C
.. ,"
(--
(' (--
<:- (-- (--
(
(
(
'
j
SUBSYSTEM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Cont'd)
TAPE UNIT CLEANING PROCEDURE FOR
3420 MODELS 3 THROUGH 8
4. CAPSTAN CLEANING-NORMAL
PROCEDURE
This procedure must be done at regular intervals by
the customer. Tape will slip on a dirty 'capstan while
accelerating.
Caution: Any capstans not kept free of glaze will
eventually build a deposit that cannot be removed
by a reasonable amount of scrubbing.
4.1 Wrap a clean. dry cloth around one index finger
and a lint-free cloth dampened with tape cleaner
around the other index finger.
c
("CCC\C
85-004
5. FILE REEL HUB
5.1 With a lint-free cloth dampened with tape cleaner.
use a light pressure to clean the following:
5.1.1 Back rubber flange.
5.1.2 Rubber ring
models.
CD or rubber pads on some
6. CARTRIDGE RESTRAINT
6.1 Use a lint free cloth to clean lower restraint • .
This metal is porous and the air flow can be
restricted by using fluids or abrasive material
during cleaning.
4.2 Vigorously wipe the capstan rubber with the
dampened cloth (without bending the capstan)
while rotating the capstan with the
dry-cloth-covered fingerCD.
.
4.3 Continue this procedure until the capstan has a
definite dull rubber finish. Any glaze must be
removed in order to operate reliably.
4.4 If the glaze cannot be removed. follow the special
Glazed Capstan Cleaning procedure on page -
08-700.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980. 1983
85-004
85-005
SUBSYSTEM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (Cont'd)
3803/3420 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE
Code
U
3420 Tape Unit
Code
U
0
R
Location
Operation
R
Location
Operation
File Protect
Pin
Frequency
Door Slide
and Stop
Pin
4 months
General
Cleaning
4 months
Code
Frequency
4 months
1. Push plunger in, check for
binds.
Lubricate the door slide and
the stop pin with IBM #17.
Power
Window
Safety Bail
2. Remove tape cleaner
block and clean with tape
cleaner.
2
Parts
Replacement
4 months
12 months
Check for the correct
operation of the power
window safety bail. If
incorrect, tighten the
setscrew in the safety bail
terminator, and adjust the
safety bail switch assembly
(see 08-000).
BIM 8492273 Puralator type
filter
5. Clean EDT IBOT channel
mirror.
BIM 8492274 Cuno type
filter
6. Clean the fiber optic
lamp. Use a tissue lightly
moistened with water.
Tape
Cleaner
Block
12 months
Caution: Allow lamp to
cool before cleaning.
Pneumatic
Supply
12 months
Check pneumatic supply
belts.
Remove the manifold and
fiber bundles to provide
access to the lamp. Replace
the lamp (08-620) if it is not
clear. Note: Cleaning or
replacement of the fiber
optic lamp may require the
readjustment of the
EOTIBOT and capstan
squaring.
Input Filter
12 months
Replace filter element of the
pressure pump input filter.
Supplied with parts
replacement B/M. Check for
Puralator or Cuno type.
Capstan
Tracking
4 months
Check and adjust Capstan
Tracking. See 08-000.
EOTIBOT
4 months
Check and adjust EDT IBOT.
See 08-580.
Location
Operation
EOTIBOT
Code
Frequency
12 months
Cooling
Filter
12 months
Air Bearing
Cleaning
12 months
Replace the tape cleaner
block. Supplied with parts
replacement B/M.
Clean cooling air filter or
replace as necessary.
1. Remove bearings.
Check and adjust Capstan
Squaring. See 08-120 or
08-130. Ensure capstan is
free from dents and does not
bind.
12 months
DC Voltage
12 months
3
Output Filter 36 months
4
Vacuum
Tubing
60 months
Replace vacuum tubing
(order BIM 4416409).
Pressure
Tubing
60 months
Replace pnuematic pressure
tubing (order BIM 4416408).
Vacuum
Pressure
Switches
60 months
Right switch plate
- with seven holes - B I M
6851766
- with five holes, one switch
top, three grouped center,
one at bottom - BIM
6851768
two switches top, three at
bottom - BIM 6851764
Radius
Sense
12 months
Clean the ends of the fiber
optic bundle if present with a
damp cloth, see 08-610 for
removal. Apply a felt pad to
the handle and lightly
dampen with tape cleaning
fluid. Hold pad to the inside
front of left reel flange and
spin by hand. This will clean
the reflective strips located
inside the left reel.
Reel Tach
12 months
Check reel tachs for glaze.
Replace reel tachs if glazed.
Glass Bead
Tape
12 months
Inspect glass bead tape on
stubby bar and in vacuum
columns. See note. Ensure
that stubby bars are not
loose and have proper
clearance. See 08-000.
High Speed
Rewind
Plunger
12 months
Check operation of the High
Speed Rewind Plunger.
(08-000) Models 3, 5, and 7
only.
Autocleaner
Check
12 months
1. Check operation of
autocleaner by marking
the ribbon and observing
ribbon movement. The
ribbon should move from
bottom to top.
2. Check the supply of
autocleaner ribbon. Order
a new autocleaner
cartridge when
approximately 3/4 inches
of ribbon is visible
through the cartridge
window. Models 4, 6,
and 8 only.
Inspect foam in front of
vacuum door glass. See
08-690. If foam replacement
is required, order BIM
4469244
Check the dc voltages.
(08-570)
Remove EDT IBOT by
remOVing the two screws
and gently move block
forward being careful not to
damage the fiber bundles if
present. Clean EDT IBOT
with a cotton swab
dampened with tape cleaner.
Replace EDT IBOT block.
Clean screens on back of
motor with vacuum cleaner.
3. Install new decorative
covers on air bearing.
Supplied with parts
replacement B/M.
Vacuum
Column
Door Foam
U
12 months
2. Brush each bearing to
remove oxide deposits.
Preamps
12 months
Location
Operation
Action
Capstan
Motor
Mod-8
Order one of the following
BIMs for required parts.
4. Clean NRZI guides.
4 months
R
3. Replace unit if any checks
produce unsatisfactory
results.
1. Clean front deck and
base.
Capstan
Tach
Squaring
Circuit
U
2. Check that plunger
extends in front of the
right hub flange.
Action
3. Remove air bearing (0
bearing) next to
EDT IBOT block and
clean. Inspect guide
behind bearing and
replace if grooved.
Action
R
\
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
Action
Replace with PIN 2524998.
Left switch plate
- with five holes, three
switches top, two at bottom
- BIM 6851765
-a" other configurations BIM 6851767
Tape transport switches
Model 3,5,7 - BIM 6851770
Model 4,6,7 - BIM 6851771
Note:
Inspect the glass bead surface of the stubby bars and vacuum
columns.
Replace if the glass bead is nicked, scratched, burred or has an
area obviously wom to the touch. (If not obviously wom, do not
replace).
Run finger on the glass bead surface at the bottom of the vacuum
column. This is a good glass bead surface and may be used as a
reference.
A wom glass bead surface will cause tape motion problems.
3803 Control Unit
Code
U
R
Location
Operation
Frequency.
Action
0
Air Filter
2 months
Check cooling air filter for
restriction of air flow. Clean
or replace as required.
2
dc Voltage
6 months
Check dc voltages. Adjust as
required to the levels
specified on decals.
Check and adjust preamps
(08-290 or 08-300).
85-005
~ Copyright International BusinassM:li!;hines CQIlIOI'ation 1976. 1979. 1980. 1983
J
Frequency
o
00 ()
C)
0
o
() 0 0
--
-~~--
(::~'
f' --
(~:
(C'
.'~'
("
(-
('~
. --~---
f"
..
f~
("~'
(~'
roo
(--
(-
(
(~
(~
.
/
(
/
(:
C"
c
(-'
~
.. - - -
- - - ------
(--"
c-
('"
(-'
(~'-
(.
('
c c
INSTRUCTIONS
This section contains installation instructions for -the
IBM 3803 Model 2/3420 Magnetic Tape Subsystem.
Companion publications pertaining to this product are:
Perform the following basic steps for each 3803
Model 2/3420 installation, regardless of the
subsystem configuration:
1.
1.
3803 Model 2/3420 Subsystem Description,
GA32-OO21
2.
3420 Model 4, 6 and 8 Parts Catalog, S 132-0007
3.
3803 Models 1 and 2 Parts Catalog, S 132-0004
4.
3420 Operator's Guide Card, S232-OO03
5.
3803/3420 OLT Users Guide
Safety Note: Ensure your own safety by using
caution at all times and by being aware of
potentially dangerous areas of the machine. Read
and follow the safety suggestions in Form
229-1264, a pocket-sized card issued to all
customer engineers and reprinted at the front of
this manual.
Caution: No portion of this procedure is to be
omitted. Perform all steps including checks and
adjustments.
c
90-000
SUBSYSTEM INST ALLA TION
INTRODUCTION
('
Refer to the checklist on 90-020 and initial each
box when an installation procedure is completed.
2.
Complete the configuration worksheet on 90-040.
Refer to the instructions on 90-030.
3.
Unpack units. (See Unpacking Instructions on this
page.)
12. Perform all checks and adjustments on 90-190.
UNPACKING INSTRUCTIONS
13. Run system diagnostics on 90-200. (Refer to
User's Guide.)
Unpack tape control and tape units.
14. If any Emulator is run on a S/360, install jumper,
see 90-200.
15. Generate a read only tape, on 90-200.
Note: It is possible to combine 3803 Models
and
2 in one subsystem. Be sure your customer
understands that a 3803 Model 1 tape control
cannot address any 3420 Models 4, 6, or 8 tape
units.
Refer to Unpacking Instructions, which are in a plastic
envelope attached to each unit. Move discarded
packing material away from work area. File Unpacking
Instructions for future reference if tape subsystem is
to be moved.
Note: Before moving 3420 tape units into place, be
sure to remove packing tape from the air flow mercury
switch and install the front kickplate. Check ESD
grounding. See 90-190, F7 and F8 before moving
machines into place.
4.
Remove the wire seal from the 3803 and 3420's,
90-180, only at this time.
5.
Install four caster locks.
6.
Install front and both side kickplates. See
90-090.
7.
Install rear kickplate. See 90-090.
8. ' Install and plug cables. See 90-050 through
90-080.
Note: The tag and bus cable pairs must be of equal
length. Paired cables of unequal length cause timing
errors resulting in hard-to-diagnose subsystem
problems.
9.
Plug address/feature/priority c~rd jumpers to
match configuration requirements, see 90-110.
Note: Check the factory-installed items such as card
juropering, and all card and cable seating. Particularly
check the write head and read head card seating.
10. Rework the 3420 Field Tester, see 90-170.
Note: Make sure customers power matches
subsystem requirements. Check for correct blower and
motor rotation.
11. Perform power supply checks and note special
tape unit power supply requirements, see 90-180.
90-000
("
j
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
90-010
CHANNEL ATTACHMENT
The 3803 Model 2 at 6250 bpi will attach to these
systems via the indicated channels:
System
3420-8
3420-6
3420-4
370/195
2860/2880
2860/2880
2860/2880
370/168
2860/2880
2860/2880
2860/2880
370/165-2
2860/2880
2860/2880
2860/2880
370/165
2860/2880
2860/2880
2860/2880
370/158
BKMPX
BKMPX
BKMPX
370/155-2
BKMPX
BKMPX
BKMPX
370/155
BKMPX
BKMPX
BKMPX
370/145
SEl
SEl
SEl
370/135
SEl
SEL
SEl
360/195
2860/2880
2860/2880
2860/2880
360/91
2860
2860
2860
360/85
2860/2880
2860/2880
2860/2880
360/75
2860
2860
2860
360/65-67
2860
2860
2860
360/50
N/A
N/A
SEl
3420
CHANNEL EPO
....f------VOLTAGE RATING LABel
CABLE RETAINING BAR
SIGNAL IN/OUT
TAPE UNIT INTERFACE
CHANNEL INTERFACE
TAPE CONTROL "COMMUNICATOR" INTERFACE
3803-2/3420
90-010
• Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979 1980
o
o
()
()
o
()
'..
('
{~~
(:~'
(~
'" ."
(:
(L
('
('-'
...
{" (:\
. .. .,
r
('
e-
(
(
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
90-020
3420 TAPE UNIT
3803-2 TAPE CONTROL
Initial Each Box When Completed
Installation Procedure
Configuration Worksheet
Unpacking
Cables
Cable Retaining Bar
Kickplates
Reference Page
Installation Procedure
Reference Page
Unpacking
90-000
Cables
90-060
90-070
Caster Locks
90-000
Kickplates
90-090
90-100
Field Tester Conversion
90-170
Wire Seal Removal
90-180
Power Supply Checks
90-180
Checks and Adjustments
90-190
System Diagnostics
90-200
0/8
1/9
2/A
3/B
4/C
5/0
6/E
7/F
90-030
90-000
90-060
90-070
90-080
90-060
90-090
Address/ Priority / Feature
Plugging
90-110
Card and Cable Seating
90-000
Operator's Panel Labels
Initial Box
When
Completed
90-160
Wire Seal Removal
90-180
Check Capacitor Mounting
Screws
90-180
Power Supply Checks
90-180
ESD Check and Adjustment
90-190
System Diagnostics
90-200
Emulator (If applicable)
90-200
Generate READ ONLY Tape
90-200
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
90-020
90-030
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
INSTRUCTIONS
Complete the configuration worksheet on Page 90-040
for your installation. Check customer requirements
before configuring each system. When installation is
completed, place worksheet in the front of subsystem
ALDs and keep as a subsystem cabling history.
Complete all applicable blocks in the worksheet for
each 3803 tape control:
•
Indicate each 3803 serial number in decimal.
B
Indicate processing unit/Channel identity and cable
numbers.
II
Assign an address to each 3803 tape control in hex
(bits 0-4, Example: 18X/3BX).
•
Assign "Select Out" priority ("high" /"Iow") for
each interface by checking applicable box.
•
Indicate features installed on each 3803 tape
control.
II
Assign 3420 addresses to each 3803. Check the
0-7 (low order) block on one "host" 3803, and the
8-F (high order) block on the other "host" 3803.
•
Draw in cabling for your configuration and insert
cable key numbers.
©
~,
,
I
',,-;/
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976, 1979
,0
\,,-~
(~,
'"
;J
n
V
0
0 ,
'J
C)
0
'",-
~
('~
",-y
0 C)
:r"'j
~
()
0
,~
~
'\
I
/
,
,[
"
'\
/
/
,/'-'"
""
r"'''>,
(
,
/
!
;/
~
I",-~
r-"'"
~~
(-
(-
(~
C
(-~-
C C
(~'
(~
(-~
{~'
('
..
"
(~
(,'
-:"
c
(~,
(-~
(:
c
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
fJ
I/O Interface Chan A
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
0
3803 Serial Number
II
3S03 Addresses
3803 Serial Number
(Decimal)
(Decimal)
a
(Hex)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - -------I/O Interface Chan B
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
o
Device Switch
7-Track NRZI
Dual Density
Two-Channel
Switch
0
D
0
D
0
0
e
0
0
•
•
G
Secondary TU Interface
TU Addresses
II CJ D
(0-7)
B
(Hex)
II (0-7)
or
B
B
T
e
B
T
I/O TAILGATE
B
B
T
T
B
B
T
T
•
--I/O Interface Chan B
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
II
(Hex)
II Features
Yes
Device Switch
0 0
9-Track NRZI
Note: Symbols. through. refer to control switch
paths A through 0 of the dev ice switching feature.
(See Section 58 for further information on this feature.)
7 & 9 Track
Two-Channel
Switch
No
D 0
D 0
D 0
Yes
No
Device Switch
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
T
0
0
(0-7)
or
(S-F)
.
I/O Interface Chan B
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
Secondary TU Interface
TU Addresses
CJ
CJ
(S-F)
(0-7)
T
~-----------
II
or
II
(S-F)
~ T.~ ~
Units
o
a
,-~--------
Features
I/O Interface Chan A
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
0
BTU Addresses
(Decimal)
(Hex)
(Low)
(High)
II
e
II
Primary Interface
• (Communicator 1 I
3803 Serial Number
3S03 Addresses
D D
Two-Channel
Switch
Units
I/O Interface Chan A
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
(Low)
(High)
7 & 9 Track
~ T.~ ~
D
D D
9-Track NRZI
Primary TU Interface
(Communicator 1)
B
TU Addresses
CJ CJ
(8-F)
or
(Low)
I/O TAILGATE
Select Out Priority
----------------
-------(High)
II
(Hex)
(Low)
D D
No
Yes
Features
D D
(High)
(Hex)
II
II 3803 Addresses
Select Out Priority
90-040
D D
D D
(Low)
Secondary TU Interface
~CJ~:rdr~~c:.~or 1) B
IIC]
CJ
(0-7) or (S-F)
T
Primary TU Interface
(Communicator 1 or 2)
T U Addresses
B
CJ c:::J
(0-7)
or
(S-F)
1/0 TAILGATE
T
II
II
Select Out Priority
(Hex)
D D
I/O Interface Chan A
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
(Hex)
D D
I/O Interface Chan B
CPU Ident.
Cable No.
II
-------- -------- - - - -
(Low)
-------(High)
(Decimal)
II 3803 Addresses
Select Out Priority
(High)
3803 Serial Number
IJ
B
Secondary TU Interface
(Communicator 2)
B TU Addresses
T
CJ
CJ
0-7, S-F
II
Primary TU Interface
(Communicator 1 or 21
B TU Addresses
T
(0-7) or (8-F)
• 1/0 TAILGATE
c::::J c:::J
II
(High)
(High)
II
Features
Device Switch
9-Track NRZI
7&9Track
Two-Channel
Switch
(Low)
(Low)
Yes
No
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
90-040
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION A: DEVICE SWITCHING
FEATURE
90-050
Figure 7. Cable Connectors
A-1 Tape subsystem configuration flexibility is provided
by field-installable switching features that allow up
to 16 tape units to be switched between four tape
controls. The three device switching features
available with the tape subsystem are:
2 Control Switch (2 X 8 or 2 X 16 configuration,
see Figures 1 and 4 on page 90-051)
3 Control Switch (3 X 8 or 3 X 16 configuration,
see Figures 2 and 3 on page 90-051)
4 Control Switch (4 X 8 or 4 X 16 configuration,
see Figures 5 and 6 on page 90-052)
A 3803 must have a Communicator installed in
order to be switched. The Communicator sends
tape unit selection and device interface signals to
one of two device switches, depending on whether
tape units 0 through 7 or 8 through F are being
addressed. The location of the device switches
depends on the configuration desired. For
example: In a 2, 3, or 4 X 8 configuration, the
switching feature is required only on the first
3803.
The Communicator is installed by removing the
selection logic circuits and the associated device
interface cabling in the basic 3803. Different logic
circuitry and cables to the device switches are
then installed.
Using a combination of the Communicator and the
2, 3, or 4 Control Switch, two, three, or four
interconnected tape controls can address a
maximum of 16 tape units. Figures 1 through 6
show some possible switching configurations and
cabling.
Note:
(1]
prj Tag
Non-host 3803 with Communicator 1
feature only. Sales Feature (FC)9071.
Sec Bus
Sec Tag
Pri Bus
Prl Tag
Non-host 3803 with Communicator 2
feature only. (FC)9073.
D Bus
TU7(F)
D Tag
TU6(E)
C Bus
TUS(D)
C Tag
Tu4(C)
B Bus
TU3(B)
B Tag
TU2(A)
Pri Bus
TU 1(9)
Pri Tag
TUO(8)
Host 3803 with 4-Control Switch feature.
(It also has the Communicator 1 feature.)
The dark gray end of the Signal cable is
indicated by the arrow tip. (See Figure 1,
90-060.)
.
© Copyright Intarnational
Pri Bus
9O~050
Busineas Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1983
()
() ()
o
()
I~
'
... /
(-
(
(
c
c
('
(
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
(
90-051
Host Control Unit
Host Control Unit
3803 No 1
FC 1792
FC 9071
3803 No 1
Fe 1793
FC 9071
3803 No 2
FC 9071
36A
1
A
C
8
A
34A 2
3
32A
13T
"
30A 4
D
36A
3"A 2
B
C
3
1
3
4
) Eight
3"20'5
) Eight
3420'5
5
B
6
PRI
388
PRI
Unused
1
138
8
) Eight
3420'5
8
8
C
D
36A
3"A 2
A
C
D
C
3803 No 2
FC 1793
Fe 9071
7
2"A
38T 8
PRI
7
7
22A 8
8
22A 8
Group 136
Group 137
Group 137
Group 136
Figure 1. 2 x 8 Switch Option
3803 No 3
FC 9073
Host Control Unit
3803 No 1
FC 1793
FC 9071
3803 No 2
FC 9071
C
36A
A
G
r
D
0
1
u
p
B
1
3
8
C
A
8
SEC
Ei ht
34~O's
8
A
PRI
B
PR I
Unused
22A 8
Figure 3. 3 x 16 Switch Option
Group 137
3803 No 3
FC 9071
3803 No 1
FC1792
FC 9071
3803 No 2
FC 1792
FC 9071
C
G
r
C
D
o
0
u
p
1
1
) Eight
1
3
8
) Eight
3420'5
3420'5
A
B
B
B
PRI
PRI
Figure 2. 3 x 8 Switch Option
3803-2/3420
© Copyright Intametional Busine•• Machines Corporation 1983' "
PR 1
Group 136
Group 137
Figure 4. 2 x 16 Switch Option
90-051
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
90-052
3803 No 4
FC 9071
3803 No 3
FC 9071
3803 No 3
FC 9073
A
SEC
A
PRI
A
8
38B
388
PRI
7
7
PRI
38T 8
38T 8
G
B
3803 No 1
FC 1794
Fe 9071
A
8
1
3
8
3803 No 2
FC 9071
C
2
5
40T
6
388
7
38T
8
SEC
40B
5
40T 6
PRI
38B
7
38T
8
r
G
1
3803 No 1
FC 1794
FC 9071
A
B
u
P
34A 2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
1
3
8
::>
Unused
40B
8
G
0
36A
0
8
A
Group139
0
C
8
Group 140
Group 140
0
u
p
3803 No 4
Fe 9073
7
7
8
8
A
PR I
7
38T 8
C
1
4
1
0
32A
1
0
C
3
30A 4
28A 5
B
::> Eight
3420's
B
26A 6
PRI
24A
7
22A 8
Group 137
Figure 5. 4 x 8. Switch Option
3803 No 2
Fe 1794
FC 9071
A
B
34A 2
8
388
u
P
36A
0
C
Eight
3420's
0
PRI
D
C
158
1
36A
15T
2
34A 2
138
3
32A
3
131 4
30A
4
118
28A
5
5
1
llT 6
26A 6
388
7
24A
7
38T 8
22A
8
::> Eight
3420's
Group 136
Group 137
Figure 6. 4 x 16 Switch Option
90-052
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1983
/
C'
,
("~
.
"~
(-.
('-
(
..
(, (",
(C"
('~
C.
(~.
("
(
(' ("
(
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION B. SUBSYSTEM CABLING
c
(~
(Toward Processor!
White (See Note)
Refer to the "Key Number" or "Connector 10"
and "X-Length" shown on each interface cable
label when placing cables (see Figure 3).
Caution: Ensure that the color scheme on the
connectors is followed.
(~
Figure 2. Power Cable
Figure 1. Signal Cable
B·1 Unpack the interface and power cables and lay in
place.
Refer to power cable connector (see Figure 2) to
ensure that power cables will be located correctly.
("
Dark gray
Shown as the arrow
head in Figures 1
through 6 on 90-050.
"Y" Dimension
B·2 Plug Cables and Terminators:
'-Tape Control
a. Plug cables at tape control and tape units. Each
tape unit's address is determined by the
position on the tape control interface panel to
which its signal cable is connected.
Caution: Do not connect 3803 power cable to
customer's receptacle at this time.
b. Insert terminators in "outgoing" cable positions
in subsystems where "outgoing" cables 132
and 133 are not used.
indicates floor
line
"X" Dimension
c. Install cable retaining bars when cabling is
complete.
B-3 Observe 'from' and 'to' designations given in
Figure 1, Page 90-070. Red or red-striped labels
indicate 'from' end of cables; white labels indicate
'to' ends of cables.
~~III
Figure 3. Dimension Explanation
"X" Dimension
Red-striped Label "From" End
"Z" Dimension
"Y" & "Z"
Dimension
Total length
Distance Between Cable
Entry Holes in Floor
Distance Above the Floor
from the Entry Hole to
the Connection within the
Machine
= sum
of X. Y. and Z dimensions.
Light gray
Black (See Note)
".t4I~---
(Away from Processor)
(Signal)
Cable Retaining Bar
External Cable Identification
Note: On chrome plated tape unit signal cable
connectors. observe the color at the center screw hole.
3803·2/3420
f: Copyright Internatlona' BUSIness MachInes CorporatIon 1976. 1979, 1980, 1983
90-060
90-070
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION B. SUBSYSTEM CABLING (Cont'd)
Figure 2. Channel Cable Maximum Length for 6250 bpi.
Figure 1. External Cables
Note: Cables are identified by either key number or connector 10.
Group
No.
Conn. 10
Plug
Location
Cable Group
Key No.
Cable PIN
From
To
Notes
-
-
-
129
129A
2281630
3803
4.5.7
129B
2523073
3420 Signal
60 Hz
3420 Power
60 Hz
130 B
5353920
3803
Multiplexor
Channel
130 T
5353920
3920
3920
-
lB
3B
lT
3T
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
A)
B)
A)
B)
01S-A1A1
01S-A1A5
01S-A1A3
01S-A1A7
130
lB
3B
1T
3T
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
A)
B)
A)
B)
01S-A1Al
01S-A1A5
01S-A1A3
01S-A1A7
131
2B
4B
2T
4T
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
A)
B)
A)
B)
01S-A1Bl
01S-A1B5
01S-Al B3
01S-A1B7
132
2B
4B
2T
4T
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
(Chan
A)
B)
A)
B)
O1S-A1Bl
01S-A1B5
O1S-A1B3
01S-A1B7
133
131 B
5353920
131 T
5353920
132B
5353920
132T
5353920
133B
5353920
133T
5353920
3803
Selector
Channel
1. 9
Control Unit
1. 9
3803
Channel-Channel
Adapter
1.3.9
5A (Chan A)
7A (Chan B)
Jl1
J13
134
134A
5351178
3803
Channel EPO
2
1178
9A
01U-Al
135
135A
5351178
3803
2065/2167
8
6456
l1B
11T
01T-A1A5
OtT-A1A6
136
136B
l36T
5466456
5466456
3803 No.2
3803 No.1
4
6456
11B
l1T
OtT-A1A5
01T-A1A6
137
137B
137T
5466456
5466456
3803 No.1
3803 No.2
4
6456
138
l3T
01T-A1A3
01T-A1A4
138
138B
138T
5466456
5466456
3803 No.1
3803 No.3
4
6556
138
t3T
01T-A1A3
01T-A1A4
139
1398
139T
5466456
5466456
3803 No.2
3803 No.3
4
6556
158
15T
01T-A1At
01T-A1A2
140
1408
140T
5466456
5466456
3803 No.1
3803 No.4
4
158
15T
01T-A1A1
01T-A1A2
141
141B
141T
5466456
5466456
3803 No.2
-
-
142 or 129
142A
2281630
3803
4.5,6,7
142B
2521595
3420 Signal
50 Hz
3420 Power
50 Hz
-
2860
2880
72 (22,0)
119 (36,3)
5/370
3420-8
2860
Mod 135
72 (22,0)
Mod 155
Mod 155-2
Mod 158
103 (31,4)
Mod 145
2880
119 (36,3)
3420-6/8
None
N/A
3420-4
BYTEMPX·
103 (31,4)
3420-8
8KMPX·
119 (36,3)
4331
[ 8 ] For use with remote channel switch special
feature.
.. Tape operations allowed only when all other byte channel
devices are quiesent.
Notes:
[1] To attach eight or less tape controls to one
channel, the last tape control must be attached to
the channel with a sum of no more than 200 feet
(61,Om) of cable. If the tape control is attached to
a 3420-6, subtract 15 feet (4,5m) for each
intervening control unit between the channel and
the last tape control. If the tape control is
attached to a 3420-8, subtract 20 feet (6,1 m) for
each intervening control unit between the channel
and the last tape control (see Note 10). For cable
length limitations when attaching a 3803-2 at
6250 BPI, see Figure 2.
[9] Part number 5466456 (24 Signal) may be
substituted for 5353920 (20 Signal) for cable
group numbers 130, 131, 132 and 133.
[10] Terminators are required when the 3803 is the
last control unit in a chain or the only control
unit on the channel. Use either 5440649 (20
position) or 2282675 (24 position) bus
terminators and either 5808324 (20 position) or
2282676 (24 position) tag terminators as
determined by the number of signal lines per
cable.
Example:
I~~~o H H~CU H~'
\CU
[2] Sequence and Control (EPO).
3803 No.4
4
143
lA
Signal
143 or (143)
143A
2281630
3420 Signal
60 Hz
3803
4,6,7
144
3A
Power
144 or (144)
l44A
2523073
3420 Power
60 Hz
3803
6.7
145
3A
Power
-
-
2521595
3420 Power
50 Hz
3803
6, 7
'.
3420-8
All Other
Systems
3803
Length • Feet
(Meters)
To Channel
5/360
1.9
1178
6556
From 3803·2
With
System
[ 7] When the number of 3420s to be connected to a
3803 Model 2 exceeds the limitations of power
(60 Hz), each extra 3420 tape unit may be
supplied power by another 3803 tape control using
cable group 144. Cable group 143 is available to
signal attach tape units using cable group 144.
With SF9001 installed, the 3803 Model 2 may
power a total of eight 3420s (any model).
200 feet (61, Om) (Maximum 200 feet (61, Om) per Figure 2)
[3] Channel to channel adapter (Sales Feature 1850).
-
30 feet ( 9, Om) (Two intervening CU = 2 X -15 ft)
170 feet (52, Om) Maximum cable length that can be used
[ 4] Total cable length from a 3420 tape unit to the
most remote 3803 tape control must not exceed
120 feet (36,6m). (Group 129 or 142, or 143, plus
group 136-141.)
[ 5 ] Includes both Signal and power cable. A maximum
of eight 3420 tape units can be connected to each
3803 Tape Control 1 and 2. Tape units cannot be
connected to tape. control 3 and 4 for power
requirements unless they are used with cable
group 144.
[6] Parenthesis indicates cables to be used in World
Trade countries for 60 Hz machines.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980•. 1983
/".-=--,,\
"'-.,;/
r"',
''''',.~
. / " pi
'" ./
/'~",
\,
/
0
\"y
("]
"-....y
0
~
\.. ./
I
()
".
0
£'"'\
!~
r,\
I
)
,>
/''1
,.;/
"
"")
r)
r)
".
./"~
'-.
,,)
./
(
'"
"1.J
0 ~Oa
',-
>'
c
c
(-
(-
c c
(90-080
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
Location 01 x·y 1
SECTION B. SUBSYSTEM CABLING (Cont'd)
Location
Caution: Refer to ALD AAOO5 Feature Plug List
before installing a replacement logic board.
OIA·AI
Notes:
Chan A
Chan 8
I
I
SA
(J 11)
7A
(JI3)
EPO
I 1>J See
134A
Note
Two-channel switch diagnostics AD through AG can
only be run when both channel interfaces are cabled to
the same central processing unit. If it is necessary to
run diagnostics AD through AG during initial checkout,
plan temporary cabling to meet this requirement.
1.
[ 1 ] Both EPO cables must be plugged if the two
channel switch feature is installed, and the two
channels are not on the same processing unit or
not on the same channel frame. Remove any
temporary jumper plugs.
A
Incoming
Cables
m:m'
IBA
20A
(Jl)
(J6)
14A
16A
(J2)
( J71
lOA
12A
(J3)
(JB)
6A
BA
(J4)
B
2B
Bus Chan A
1 lB
[ 3 Bus Chan A
lT
Tag Chan A
2T
Tag Chan A
3B Ie
Bus Chan B
4B '"
Bus Chan B
3T '"
Tag Chan B
4T '"
Tag Chan B
(See Note 4) <[ 57
US)
1.
j
Tape Unit Power
(S) 60 Hz
> 1298
142B (8) "
",
[ 2] For cable, part 5466456 (48 pin), use terminator,
part 2282675 (bus) and 2282676 (tag).
For cable, part 5353920 (40 pin), use terminator,
part 5440649 (bus) and 5440650 (tag).
[3] Panel Y1 is located in position 01A-A3 unless the
3803-2 has optional features installed. On feature
machines, panel Y1 is located in positon 01X-Y.
[ 4 ] For cable group number, key number, part number,
to and from relationship, see Figure 1 on 90-070.
: 1 Outgoing
Cables
• Cables plugged when the two-channel switch
feature is present.
132. 133
or Terminator
(See Note 4)
:J
Convnunicator
3B03
3B03
3B03
3B03
No I
No 2
No 3
No 4
1408
1418
140T
14lT
138B
139T
137B
136B
1398
141B
C
Bus
15B
TU 7 (F)
36A
Tag
1ST
TU 6 (E)
34A
2
3
Bus
13B
TU 5 (D)
32A
3
4
Tag
13T
TU 4 (C)
30A
4
5
Bus
40B or lIB
TU 3 (B)
28A
5
TU 2 (A)
26A
6
2
139B
13ST
A
--alTAICI
137T
136T
139T
14lT
6
Tag
40T or lIT
136B
137B
I3BB
140B
7
Bus
38B
TU I (9)
24A
7
S
TaT
38
TU 0 (Bl
22A
8
137T
13BT
140T
136T
(See Details on 90-050)
>
129A (B) 60 Hz
142B (B) 50 Hz
3803 Nos I and 2 only
J....j:o~. . Power In 3A(1298, 142S, 1448)
_OlTAIC8
~=-- Signal In/Out 1A(129A, 142A, 143A)
Ground Point for Signal Cable
3803-2/3420
90-080
~-~~~~--~-~-------------
90-090
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
Figure 1. 3803 (Front and Rear Kickplates)
3420 (Rear Kickplates) "
SECTION C. KICKPLATES
C-1 Install 3803 front and rear kickplates and 3420
rear kickplates as shown in Figure 1.
3803 (Front and Rear!
3420 (Rear!
1. Attach pins, nuts, and retaining clips to front
and rear frame members of the 3803 and rear
frame member of each 3420 as shown in
Figure 1.
2. Mount kickplates by pushing brackets onto
pins. Clips must be positioned below lower
flange of brackets.
Note: Leave 3420 rear kickplates off until
cabling is complete.
Pin (PIN 5356446)
3. Turn nuts on pins to level kickplates.
Bracket
4. If necessary, realign 3803 covers after
kickplate installation.
Kickplate
clip (PIN 237245)
Figure 2. 3420 (Front Kickplates)
C-2 Install 3420 front kickplates as shown in Figure
2.
1. Install front kickplates before moving tape units
into place.
2. Elongated holes in the bracket allow kickplate
to be leveled and adjusted to clear the front
cover.
3803-2/3420
90-090
© Copyright International Buain ••• Machines Corporation 1976, 1979, 1980, 1983
o
o
()
o
o ()
("'1
...~ y
~/"-.~
(
.'
~.Y
{--
( ..
(
-
(--
(
(90-100
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION C. KICKPLATES (Cont'd)
Figure 3. 3803, 3420 Side Kickplates
C-3 Install 3803 and 3420 side kickplates as shown
in Figure 3.
1. Install side kickplates only on the machines at
each end of a group. Use screw PIN 731629.
2. Open or remove covers to attach kickplates.
Use 12-inch (305 mm) kickplate, part
2501286 (notched corner!. on cover adjacent
to tape unit power door hinge. Use 13
1/8-inch (333 mm) kickplate, part 5356406,
on remaining side covers for 3420 tape units
and 3803 tape controls.
C-4 Typical Subsystem Configuration
Sufficient side kickplates, parts 2501286 and
5356406, are shipped for the configuration
shown in Figure 4. Kickplates are not provided
for installation between adjacent tape units.
Order additional side kick plates by MES, if
needed for other configurations.
3803 (Side)
3420 (Side)
Figure 4. Subsystem Configuration
Part 5356406
Part 5356406
Part 5356406
Rear
Rear
3420
3420
Tape,Units
Tape;Units
Front
Front
C-5 Install caster locks (4each), PIN 280336.
Part 2501286
(Notched)
Part 5356406
Part 2501286
(Notcned)
3803-2/3420
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980. 1983
90-100
90·110
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION D. TAPE CONTROL
ADDRESS/FEATURE/PRIORITY CARD
PLUGGING
Example:
0-1 3803 Address (Channel" A"): Verify factory
plugging.
Controller
Address
)
Bus Out
Card Row
6·1
Card row
Card location = B2M2
Card type = 2258
Z
y
X
Controller Address
is'X8X'.
'-C
z
t
!!!!!i
II
-
y
X
h~
n
l
.... f
("3-high" card.)
L._
~------~~--------n---------w-------~~rd
'--__....J"L..-__....JIIL--__--'IIL..-__--' Col.
Plug for 0
Plug for 1
•
Plug if 3803 has device
switching capability.
Disconnect-In Handling: 5/360 or 5/370.
I
(2 x 16)
(3 x 16)
(4 x 16)
"1 } Plug if 3803 has selection logic (I x8)
1..
with 3420s addressed 0-7.
'''' l
n
f
Plug if 3803 has selection logic (lx8)
with 3420s addressed 8-F.
Device switch
0-2
a. 3803 with address ~ 8
b. With device switching capability.
: 4: 3 2 1 0
Card Col.
III
J
Example shows card plugged for:
3420 Addresses
r------
------,
Plug this position for 360.
I
I
Card location = B2L2
Card type = 1538
1
1
1
4-2
Card row
I
T
000
Plugging· Data
I
I
360
Plug 360 if either Chan A (or B with 2CS) is connected to any
channel that does not have disconnect in handling capability.
370
Plug ~~ if Chan A (and B with 2CS) is connected to any
chan~el
L-_____---.JL-_ _ _..JL_ _ _ _ _ _....H _ _ _ _ _.... Col.
Card Row
Column T
4
3
2
© Copyright Intamational Business Machines Corporltion 1976. 1979. 1980. 1983
0
,)0
~0
0
\. JI"
~
0
0
!~y'
35
("3-high" card)
34
• •-1-•
• • •
T
000
1
36
Plug this position for 370.
,"""",
I
I
I
_I
I--------.II......--------rnr--------rnr------; ~rd
~\
36-34
Card location = B2L2
Card type = W046
1
that has disconnect in handling capability.
("2-high" card)
\ __ Ji
Card row
I
I
________ J
Card Row
Column T
I - - - -........-------,nr-----,nr-----'I Card
~
II
_ _ _...... L._ _ _ _..JL_ _ _ _.....IL_ _ _ _...J Col.
90-110
(--
C C C C (,
(
("
(-
('-
("
f'
(
{
(
(
('
(~
C-"
(
c-
(=
(--
(-
f
(~-
(~
(-.
(-
C
('
<-'
SUBSYSTEM INST ALLAY ION (Cont'd)
SECTION D. TAPE CONTROL ADDRESS!
FEATURE! PRIORITY CARD PLUGGING
(Cont'd)
(e,
90-120
0-4 Features (when applicable to your machine):
a. Two Channel Switch Feature: Verify factory
plugging.
0-3 Select Out Priority:
Tape controls are factory-wired to respond to a
select out signal (high priority). If ("low
priority'" is desired, change the B2 panel
wiring to convert a 3803 tape control to respond
to a select in signal. Refer to wiring charts
below for rework.
'High' Priority
(3803 Responds to 'Select
Out')
'Low' Priority
(3803 Responds to 'Select
In')
Card Row
Card location = 82D2
("3·high" card.)
Card type = W032
000
To
From
To
V4D09
T4BOB
S2P11
S2P09
V4B08
T4D09
V4D09
T4B08
S2P11
T4D09
S2P09
V4B08
U6C02
U4B08
R2P11
To
R2P09
U6B04
U4D09
From
U6C02
U4B08
R2P11
To
U4D09
R2P09
U6B04
6
-j
_1-
.
Plug if Two Channel Switch
feature is installed.
• • •
Plug if Two Channel Switch
feature is not installed,
__~n~__~II~__~II,~__~J
b. Two-channel switch feature (3803 Address
Channel "B"): Verify factory plugging,
Example:
Channel
Address
Bus Out
Card Row
Card Col
Channel B (XM181)
From
G
8-6
~
7
1- Card Col
Channel A (FC281)
From
8
Card location = B2N2
("2-high" card.)
Card type = 9149
6-1
T
S
R
..•".
:4:3210
:6 :5 : 4 3 2 1
z ZZZ~ I}
00000.
-
Plug for 0
Plug for 1
65
ZIt
lUI'
. 3803 has device
. {(2
Plug If
(3 xx 161
161
switching capability,
(4 x 161
Plug if 3803 has selection logic (lx8)
with 3420s addressed 0-7,
Plug if 3803 has selection logic (lx8)
with 3420s addressed 8-F.
Example shows card plugged for:
a. 3803 with address = 8.
b. With device switching capability.
c. NRZI Feature: Verify factory plugging.
Card location = A2M2
("3-high" card.1
Card type = W032
000
Card Row
8
7
•
-L-1
• •
6
8-6
~
__~II~__~II,____~JI~__~
Card Col
G
L ____{
Plug if NRZI feature is
installed.
Plug if NRZI feature is
not installed.
90-120
(-~'
90-130
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION D. TAPE CONTROL
ADDRESS/FEATURE/PRIORITY CARD
PLUGGING (Cont'd)
0-6 a. Data In Handling: 5/360 or 5/370.
Card row
0-5 Primary/Secondary Tape Unit Interface Control:
4847
a. With device switching capability.
, - • Plug primary high/secondary low when primary
interface will access 3420 addresses 8-F • or secondary
interface will access 3420 addresses 0-7.
(This TCU hosts devices 0-7.)
I
I
I
I
27-25
Card row
uuu
Card row
27
26
("3-high" card.)
Column 9
Card type = 9909
35
=A 1C2
Z
I I
y
X
Column
•
•
•
Z
Card type = 2272
Y
N
88
• • •
Channel B
Card Row 35
Channel A
Card Row 40
("3-high" card.)
25
--------,
9
Card location = A2E2
Card location
40
'M
(See Note)
X
- - ..* 5 / 3 6 0 - - -
-
!'* 5/370- -
•
•
•
Column
Z
y
X
I
1------1- -
~__~II~____~Il'______JJl~____~
Card
Col.
Note: A 3803 tape control with communicator
only. (no tape units attached) assigns the
low pair of cables to the primary interface.
Card
Card.
Note: Data Flow Check asymmetry. Do not
change jumpers unless card is replaced. This is a
factory adjustment only.
b. If you have Selection Logic (2x8)' go to step
0-9 on page 90-160, if device entry, else go to
90-180.
If you have 2x, 3x or 4x switch, proceed to step
0-7 on page 90-140.
b. With selection logic (1x8).
r - -
3803 tape control With tape Unit addresse 8-F.
I
I
Card row
30
IL ________ _
30-28
Card row
Plug primary low/secondary high when primary
interface will access 3420 addresses 0-7. or secondary
interface will access 3420 addresses 8-F.
(This TCU hosts devices 8-F.)
Note: A host tape control always accesses attached
3420s via its secondary interface.
29
Plug each channel independently as follows:*
*360
Plug 360 if the attached channel does not have
data in/data out capability.
**370 Plug 370 if the attached channel has data
in/data out capability.
If attached to a 2880 channel. bus out checks
may occur if channel timings are not optimized.
The 2880 must be at EC718040 level or higher.
*W / 0 2CS-Channel B may be plugged to 360 or 370
since it is not used.
28
I
Card location = A2E2
("3-high" card.)
Column L
Card type = 9910
•
• •
I
, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...J
L
000
I
I
I
L- -
~__~II~____Jl~__~Jl~__~
-
3803 tape control With tape Unit addresses 0-7
Card
Col.
Note:
A 3803 tape control with selection logic
(h8) only uses the secondary interface.
90-130
© Copyright Int.rnational BUSiness Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980. 1983
O·
I
\,,-
.
'. 000'~'
'il ; J .
".
'''L j
,
'J
\ '
I
I,
r' '1
O~
\y
.
-:
(~
"j
(',,\
""-,,,
\'-...-
.
'\
)
;'"' '
'0
/-'1
"-.i'
/'
\
)
",...')..,
!if
'"
./
(
C"
,
(~
c
(~\
(
/
c
(
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
('
90-140
SECTION D. TAPE CONTROL
ADDRESS/FEATURE/PRIORITY CARD
PLUGGING (Cont'd)
0-7 Tape Switching Feature Address Control: Change
or verify jumper plugging of host 3803 tape
controls only.
' '
2XS and 2X16 Switch Configuration
1. For installations with less than a full
complement of 3420 tape units (for example,
2x12)' plug all cards present as if the
non-existent tape units had addresses assigned
to them.
B3H2
B3J2
Card Row
Column
50
-- -- ---I
k
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
-
1.--.,'
1\
0 }
S
K
0
}
J
0
H
0 }
0
~-'
0 ...... ( 4
G
F
1\
S
....... .......
.......
....... .......
Location
B3K2
B3L2
Location
A3L2
A3M2
A3N2
I
High Order HOST 3S03 ( 3420 addresses S- F )
/I
II
II
-
r-
Location
A3L2
A3M2
A3N2
A3P2
0
II
I
II
(4-7)
n
(0-3)
/I
-
I
II
/I
-
(4-7)
Jl
Location
A3Q2
A3R2
A3S2
A3T2
I
Jl
-
Low Order HOST 3S03 ( 342Q addresses 0-7 )
(0,3)
/I
_..-.
L
Location
A3Q2
A3R2
A3S2
(0-3)
...-
4X8 and 4X16 Switch Configuration
Low Order HOST 3S03 (3420 addresses 0- 7 )
Location
.--- -
Jumper cable locations for switch cards:
3XS and 3X16 SWitch Configuration
Low Order HOST 3S03 ( 3420 addresses 0- 7 )
(4-7)
I
/I
"
"
"
High Order HOST 3S03 ( 3420 addresses 8 F)
High Order HOST 3S03 ( 3420 addresses S-F )
2. As each switch card is pulled, refer to the chart
on Page 90-150 and verify that device selection
priority assignments are correct.
Location
B3H2
B3J2
Location
(S-B)
A3Q2
A3R2
A3S2
I0
i
Jl
JI
II
-
Location
B3K2
83L2
(C-F)
I
"
/I
II
I
II
-
Location
A3L2
A3M2
(8-B)
II
~
A3N2
II
I
/I
~
Location
A3Q2
A3R2
A3S2
A3T2
(S-B)
II
II
-
r-
Location
(C-F)
I
"
/I
(C-F)
A3L2
A3M2
A3N2
A3P2
;
II
/I
1\
:ll
,
3803-2/3420
90-140
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION D. TAPE CONTROL
ADDRESS/FEATURE/PRIORITY CARD
PLUGGING (Cont'd)
0-8 Device Selection Priority Assignments: Verify that
factory plugging of priority jumpers on the switch
cards is correct.
90-150
2x8 and 2x 16 Switch Configuration
Location:
Location:
Location:
83H2
83K2
A3L2
A3Q2
A3L2
A3Q2
No duplication of priority should exist between
sets of cards in one 3803 tape control.
3.
All cards must have T23-U23 connected by a
jumper wire.
4.
Factory plugging for these cards should be as
shown, and should not have to be changed for
any installation.
5.
This plugging establishes priority; if two 3803s try
to access the same 3420 tape unit simultaneously,
the 3803 with the least number of jumpers will
take control.
I
8888~8888
~
<------n---'
A priority must be assigned to each set of cards.
2.
Priority 1
~
IT--- 1r ----
~
Priority 1
Column
~
n
83J2
83L2
A3M2
A3R2
A3M2
A3R2
~
Priorrty 2
I
~1I88
J
ii38
n
IT
3803 Switch Path
§.
._---
ii38~
IT---lr-----
"e
3803 Switch Path
LocatIon:
Location:
A3N2
A3S2
A3N2
A3S2
ill38
I----'lfi
PrrOrlty 3
1T . -----If----
o
I
II
II
3803 Switch Path "D"
Location:
OOO
0000
-
i .
1138
-iIT
Priorrty 3
OOOOO}
OOOO}
,
"e"
I
n
II
II
Priority 2
1138
o
o
o
II
I
~1188
---If~
Prlorrty 2
II
3803 Switch Path "8"
Location:
ii38
n
Priority 1
IT
II
Location:
I
I
=~
Location:
45 - - - - - 37
I
I
I
I
I
I
..
3803 Switch Path "8"
3803 Switch Path "8"
Row
I
I
8888 8888
Connect a jumper cable to locations for switch cards as
shown below:
P
3803 Switch Path "A"
3803 Switch Path "A ..
3803 Switch Path "A"
Plugging Rules:
1.
4x8 and 4x 16 Switch Configuration
3x8 and 3x 16 Switch Configurations
~
o
o
o
o
,
A3P2
A3T2
Always connect the
jumper horizontally.
I
I.,
all
I'
II
Priorrty 4
II
II
90-150
(h COPYright International BUSiness Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
I~)
\....-
~
\,-/
I
",,,,,,,
I
.
'-...._./
0
("'I
.~
'~)
~
I",-y!
r""\
\....~
/"
" ''']
)
//-
"
"\
,,c~
\,
)
Y
rj
"'-j
('
,0
'-..
•
r
""
" )
\
f
-"1
'~_;J
(-"'I
\"
CsU~YS~M ~~ST!~LA~'ON ~~On~~)
(-
('
(-
(
('-
f
('
C
(/ (/ ("
r--
(""
f" f'
(C
('- ("- (
C C/
(~'
('
(~
90-160 -
SECTION D. TAPE CONTROL
ADDRESS/FEATURE/PRIORITY CARD
PLUGGING (Cont'd)
0-9 Apply labels to tape control operator's panel as
shown.
a. Operator's Panel Labels
For the 3803 that "hosts" tape units 0-7:
1. Use labels furnished to indicate addresses of
tape control associated with each group of
operator panel switches.
o
Address of Tape Control Attached to
Address of 'Host' Tape Control
Channel A
o
Channel B
• •••••••
2. Apply 3420 address labels 0-7 above each
group of switches as shown.
Address of Tape Control Attached to
1 234
e
567
Tailgate
Ch,mnel A
Channel B
o
567
Channel A
Channel B
• •••••••
Channel B
1
234
• •••••••
•
2. Apply 3420 address labels 8-F above each
Address of 'Host' Tape Control
CD
o
Tailgate
234567
• •••••••
b. Operator's Panel Labels
For the 3803 that "hosts" tape units 8-F:
1. Use labels furnished to indicate tape control
addresses associated with each group of
operator panel switches.
Tailgate
o 1 234 567
Address of Tape Control Attached to
Channel A
e
Address of Tape Control Attached to
e
Tailgate
Channel A
B9ABCDEF
Channel A
89ABCDEF
Channel B
• •••••••
Channel B
• •••••••
group of switches as shown.
Address of Tape Control Attached to
e
Tailgate
Address of Tape Control Attached to
Channel A
8
Channel B
• •••••••
9
ABC
0
E
F
e
Tailgate
Channel A
89
Channel B
• •••••••
ABCDEF
Note: Symbols. through. refer to control switch
paths A through 0 of the device switching feature.
3803-2/3420
90-160
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
(~
90-170
SUBSYSTEM INSlALLATION (Cont'd)
FIELD TESTER CONVERSION
Data Rate Switch Position
Do the following rework to make the field tester
compatible with 3420 Models 4, 6, and 8. The new EC
Level is 734316. (The field tester remains compatible to
3420 Models 3, 5, and 7.)
Add
Model
8
16
32
64
3
32.8
16.4
8.2
-
16.4
8.2
4.1
10.0
5.0
-
10.0
5.0
2.5
-
4
1.
Remove the four screws from the bottom of the
tester. Then remove the cover. Check the probe
side of the card / connector socket block:
20.0
5
-
6
a. If connections are made by means of a printed
circuit card, replace the cover and four retaining
screws, then skip to step 7.
b. If connections are made by means of wire
wrapping, proceed to step 2.
12.4
7
-
8
6.2
3.1
-
6.2
3.1
1.6
Probe Side View
Side View
0000000000000
13
G
(Bl)
2
Card
OOOOOOOOOOOOB
1
0000000000000
13
(At!
2
Cables
OOOOOOOOOOOOB
I
-
Install in Tester Box
This Side First
Note: Take any 3420 tape unit Incident Report (lR) and
code your time, using Service Code 33, ECA #991.
2.
Remove the logic card, unplug the signal cables,
and slide the connector block out.
3.
Delete yellow wire from 81G02 to A2813.
4.
Add #30 gauge SLT wire from 81J05 to A2813.
5.
Reassemble the tester: slide the connector block
into the tester, plug the cables, and install the logic
card.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
Replace the cover and the four retaining screws.
II
Install label, part 1845758, to the right of the data
rate switch (8, 16, 32) as shown.
II
Install label, part 1845760, over the existing
instructions (1-3) on top of the tester.
9.
Before converting a Model 3, 5, or 7 tape unit to a
Model 4, 6, or 8, take the tape unit offline. Then
connect the field tester.
Unload drive before plugging or unplugging te~ter.
Place tape unit in off-line status.
Connect at A 1 N5. wiring side.
Jumper K2P02-M2D06 for 6250 operation.
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
fJ
Note: Simulate a Model 4, 6, or 8 by grounding
N5802 on the tape unit.
10. Mount and load a CE work tape. Then set the field
tester to WRITE CONTINUOUS. See 80-020.
11. Scope test point A1H1811 (-WRITE DATA TRACK
PI. at the tape unit. Observe a full write cycle
period and compare to the chart below. Make sure
the data rate switch is set correctly for the tape
unit model being used.
Note: Times are nominal and are given in
microseconds. Tolerance is ±5%.
3803-2/3420
©
90-170
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979
0000
o
()
/1
/
i
/
C'
~.
c
(; (,
(.
(-
(~'
(~
(-' ("
(._- (>-
. -
('\ C
(
c
90-180
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION E. POWER SUPPLY CHECKS
E-1
Remove the wire seal from the 3420 tape unit
J 1 power connector, and the wire seal from
around the 3803 Model 2 power plug.
E-2 With power off, check the 18 filter capacitor
mounting screws on the 3803 Model 2 tape
control's +6v and -4v power supplies. If loose,
tighten the screws being careful not to
over-torque and damage the power board. Also,
check all other power supply screws and
connections. (See 08-575.)
Capacitor Mounting Screw,
3803 logic page YFO 10 (60 Hz) or YFO 15 (50
Hz).
See Page 08-570 to determine if each tape unit
has a modified power supply. Then, refer to logic
pages listed for the connections to be changed:
Frequency
Logic Pages Affected
(Model 3, 5, 7)
60 Hz
YB010·, YB020#, YB030#
50 Hz
YB015·, YB025#, YB035#
(Model 4, 6, 8)
60 Hz
YfOl0·, YF020#, YF030#
50 Hz
YF015·, YF025#. YF035#
* For tape units with "Modified"
power supplies.
# For all tape units.
E-4 Customer Power PhaSing
Check three-phase ac power receptacles to ensure
proper motor rotation in each unit. Any Improper
phasing must be corrected before power IS
applied to the subsystem.
E-5 With power on, check that all blowers and
motors operate correctly.
a. Incorrect phasing of input voltage causes the
tape unit pneumatic supply motor to turn
backward. preventing the tape unit from .
loading.
b. The cooling fan assembly blower motor in the
tape unit will run backwards. Remove filter
from machine and observe the direction of the
fan as power is dropped. Fan should turn
clockwise when viewed from below. (See
arrow.)
3420 Tape Unit Models 3. 5. and 7:
Test Point
Tolerance (Note 1)
'6v
4.05v
A 1G 1E09-A 1G2008
A 1N3002-A 1N3008
:!:O.lv
:!:0.05v
3420 Tape Unit models 4, 6, and 8:
Test Point
Tolerance (Note 11
+-6v
-4.05v
A lG2B ll-A 1G2008
A 1H 1C09-A 1G2008
:to.lv
:to.05v
Note 1: Ripple specifications for -4v and +6v are 24 mv
peak-to-peak. Measure at power supply. Refer to DC Logic page
for your machine for TB locations. (YB020. YB025 or YF020.
YF025)
Special Power Requirement8-3420 Model 8, 60 Hz Only
In certain 1x8 or 2x 16 - 3420 configurations. which include the
3420 Model 8. a single 3803 cannot supply the power
necessary for the operation of the subsystem without a special
power feature. The table below shows the maximum number of
tape units that may be powered from one 3803 without this
special feature.
Number of
3420
Model8's
3803 Tape Control
Test Point
+-6v
-4.Ov
B2S2M 11-B2S2008
A2T4B06-A2T4008
Tolerance (Note 21
:!:O.Olv
:to.Olv
Caution: A ground loop has been purposely
installed in the 3803 tape control for
electro-static discharge (ESD) control. The
installed ground loop is in the tape signal tail
gate connector, and must be disassembled to
check for other ground loops.
The tape control is checked at the factory for
ground loops.
o
2
1
4
4
1
2
3
1
•
Number of
3420
Model 3-6
6
5
5
4
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
Note 2: Ripple specification for -4v. IS 80 mv peak-to-peak and for
--6v IS 10 mv peak-to-peak. Measure at power supply_
Number of
3420
Model 7'8
1
o
o
o
o
2
4
o
3
2
1
2
4
5
,
o
5
4
3
2
,
o
•
o
2
3
4
5
6
•
If only one 3420 Model 8. then any combination of seven
additional tape units is permissible.
If your customers requirement exceeds the table. you must order
SF9001 for the 3803(sl. (For example. if he needs more than
six Model 8s or two Model 8s and six Model 7s on a single
38031.
In all cases where this power supply feature is ordered. the
customer must install a 100 Amp power source.
Note: All blowers in the tape control are single
phase.
E-6 Mount and load a tape. Using a Digital
Voltmeter, part 453585. 453046, or equivalent.
check that the +6 volt and -4 volt power
supplies are within the tolerances listed:
E-3 With power off, check that the customer's
supply voltage matches that shown on the
voltage rating label.
Note: To connect a 3803 tape control for
operation at a different input voltage, refer to
3803-2/3420
90-180
• Copyright Inla'national BUIIi...... Machi.... Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980
90-190
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION F. CHECKS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
F-6 Autocleaner Tape Direction-3420
Caution: Do not check autocleaner until tape
unit has been positioned online, and just prior
to returning machine to customer.
Note: Make sure the write head card is seated
properly before continuing.
This section outlines checks, adjustments, and tests to
ensure that the tape units and tape controls operate
normally when the subsystem is turned over to the
customer. See "Checks, Adjustments, Removals, and
Replacements" sections of this manual for details.
Check that autocleaner tape moves from bottom
to top by marking tape and observing direction.
See 08-380, "Autocleaner Operational Check".
F-7 ESD Grounding-3420 and 3803
Check that each door strike and roller assembly is
adjusted correctly to ensure sufficient
electro-static discharge (ESD) grounding.
F-1 Altitude Vacuum Level Setting-3420
Using a water manometer with a pressure divider;
or a pressure/vacuum gauge, part 5495384,
measure the vacuum according to the decal on
the transfer valve. If incorrect:
3420
3803
This adjustment is accomplished as follows:
a. 3420 Models 3 through 7:
a. With the screws loose, adjust the roller
assembly so the door roller will latch on the
strike plate.
Check that the vacuum pump belt and transfer
valve plug are set as shown in 08-410.
b. 3420 Model 8 only:
b. If necessary, adjust the plate mounted between
the strike and frame to ensure proper
grounding between the plate and finger stock
assembly.
Adjust vacuum line restrictor to obtain vacuum
shown in 08-410.
F-2 Regulator Air Pressure-3420
Note: Check that the door latching adjustment is
still correct.
Check/adjust pressure as shown in 08-405.
F-3 Capstan-3420
Caution: Allow fiber optics lamp to warm up
20 to 30 minutes before making adjustments.
lower rear door (1).
upper and lower on the front and rear
doors (4).
F-8 ESD Grounding-3803
a. Check the adjustment of the ESD plates on
both the 'left and right sides. Be sure the
plates are installed with the hem toward the
inside of the machine.
Do capstan tach adjustment. See 08-130 for
models 3, 5, 7 or 08-120 for models 4, 6, 8.
F-4 Mechanical Skew-3420
a. Visually check tracking before adjusting the
skew plate. Perform procedure on page
08-150 or 08-160.
Caution: Be
adjusted to
will reverse
lose proper
b. Check that mechanical skew meets the
specifications given in 08-170 (1600 and
6250 bpi) or 08-180 (NRZI).
b. If necessary, adjust the plates so that each
one bows out sufficiently to make contact with
the hat section of the side cover.
c. Check the side door latch for a firm latching
and adjust, if necessary.
F-5 BOT/EOT-3420
Caution: Allow fiber optics lamp to warm up
20 to 30 minutes before making the
adjustments.
sure that the plates are not
bow too much because the plates
bow when the door is closed and
grounding.
F-9 Data Flow Clock Asymmetry
Adjustment- 3803
If the A 1C2 card is replaced in the 3803, see
ALD AA010 sheet 2 of 3, for adjustment
procedure. (Originally factory adjusted.)
Verify BOT/EOT adjustment. See 08-580.
3803-2/3420
• Ccpyri.-n IId8mationaI B...u-
~
Corpar-. 1976. 1979. 1980
C)OOOO
()
o
C)
o o o
/'
I ""
'-,
"
.~
"
'"
j!
0
"--/
0
\,,,Y
0,
\,,~y
()
o o
C) C)
(
(~
(:
c-
(-~
"\
.
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION G. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
Note: Make sure the write head card is seated
properly before continuing.
G-1 Run 3420 OLTs A-K, M-X and AB through AG.
(AB) through AG must be run under OLTSEP. AB is
a diagnostic for 3803s with a device switching
feature. AD through AG are optional for 3803s
with the two-channel switch feature. (You must
have a "dedicated" system to run diagnostics AB
through AG.)
('~.,
/
c' c c c'90-200
(~
(~\
EMULATOR: (If applicable to your machine.)
If the 3803 is attached to a System/360 on which
any emulator is run, install a jumper on each tape
unit to disable LOAD FAIL IRPT:
3420-3, 5, and 7, between A 1H2U12 and
A1H2U08
3420-4, 6, and 8, between A 1M2U12 and
A1M2U08
Note: OLT section 3420L will run only under
sense switch setting (3420L/EXT=9). Verify PE
clipping levels on machines with PE feature.
G-2 Verify serial numbers, EC levels, and features from
the diagnostic printout.
a. If the tape control information is incorrect, see
plugging chart on 90-210, or AA010 in the 3803
ALDs.
b. If the tape unit information is incorrect, see
plugging chart on 90-210, and 90-212 or A6106
in the 3420 ALDs.
G-3 When the diagnostics have run error free, generate
and save for future use a read only tape in 6250
bpi mode.
a. Enter the following as shown:
r 01, 'DEVICE/3420A-G /fe,ext=z/'
b. To ensure that a good tape has been generated,
the program must run without error. When a
good tape has been generated, remove' the write
enable ring.
c. Mark this reel 6250 bpi READ ONLY and save
, for diagnostic use with Section 00-01 0 of the
MLMs.
Note: The CE should retain the output from
Sections "V" and "W" of the OLTs which will give
a printed table listing of all tape unit performance
measurements.
90-200
@ Copyright International BUlin••• Mlchln.. Corporation 1978. 1979•.1980; 1983
90-210
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION G. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
(Cont'd)
G-4 Tape Control Serial Number/EC Level/Feature
Code: Verify from diagnostic printout that factory
plugging is correct when diagnostics are run.
Plugging example: tape control serial number is
10430, with 9-track feature.
10430
Two channel switch, device switching, and EC level.
-10000
430
Feature code tape control serial number
Purpose
O~;"", • 01 AE H'~1,
I
Two channel switch (1 if installed)
_
1
Sense Byte 13
Purpose
51
.----l
I
Feature Code:
00 = Basic Densities only
~
10 = 9·Track Feature........
{'
11 = 7· & 9·Track FeatUie
~
Tape control serial no.
Low order in h e x _
-(
a
8
1
7
2
3
6
4
5
6
3
2
7
Z
I
50
I 49
.......
Card row
.......
~
5
..............
....
....
....
....
....
........
Sense Byte 14
Sense
Bit
Card
Col.
o
8
1
7
2
3
6
5
4
5
6
3
2
J
Tape control serial no.
Low order in hex -
\
1
Z
7
I 45 I 44
--+-e
",
39 Col.
-8
__ --------
----
,.,
",
°l~0
-'
o
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
(Shown plugged for
MIS (TCS) and 2x8 low)
Card
Col.
~
8
7
~~.
6
5
I
I
~~
3
2
1
Z
I
-
: I:
I
Sense
Bit
}-
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
I
1
When plugged, the columns will become either a one (1) or a zero (0).
-
0
/'
./
./
./
r-----------------~----~--~--~I~~I--_Y~/'
When plugged, the columns will become
either a one (1) or a zero (0).
(~
"'-J
1-
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1976. 1979. 1980, 1983
(~
(~
~
(I
',,-.y'
1"""",
<.J
J
0
~)
0
0",--y
I"~
I~
r~
~
C)
1'" I
I
",-y
0
r)
",.
,r'""I
,t'O ' \
I
~./
Y
"
/
/'
~,
\
(
\,
v
r'l '",r'·,
"
)I
./
,~
I
/'
0.
\".)
Set Logic (No Device Switch)
2x8 Low
3x8 Low
TUs 0-7
4x8low
Communicator only
2x8 High
3x8 High
TUs8.F
4x8 High
H C level (O-F) relates to diagnostic
eleases. Refer to T34201 for EC
Levels .
5
6
7
/'
e-+-e
I
I
3
./
0
I
-------
2
./
~Io
..-.
o I
Card location A2R2 (3-high card).
./
I 40 I 39
o
------------
./
---r-e
e--L... I 0
41
0
0
./
~
Card row
~IO
....
....
........ II ........-. .... -z
I 0
o I
I
44
_---
Sense Bytes .......... 13 ...... 14 ...... 17
Card row
46
49
0
)
1
----
Card
1
Sense Byte 1 7
C)
1"""'"1
,
\,
I
)),,1
(/.")
'"
}
}
(-
C
c;
C C
(~
-.-
(-'
(~
(:
f-
(-
(~
(-
C (\
('- ('
(
(~
(-
('~
('"
C
SUBSYSTEM INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
SECTION G; SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
Tape Unit Serial Number/Model Number/EC
Level/ Feature Code: Verify from diagnostic
printout that factory plugging is correct on all tape
units when diagnostics are run (3420) ALD A6106.
Model 3
A, B, P
Model 5
C, D, Q
Model 7
E, F, R
Model 4
G, H, S
Model 6
J, K, T
Model 8
M, N, U
/
/
/
M
1
1
0
0
1
1
N 0 1 0 -
1 -
0
1
Card Col..
Model 3
Model 4
Model 5
Model 6
Model 7
ModelS
N
M
L
Card row
54
I
:
I
I :
I
0
When plugged, the columns will
become either a one (lIar a zero (01.
53
I
52
I
I 0
I 0
I
---r--
I
I
I
I
I
-----1
(0 nly on Mod 4,6,8
L2 Cardl
-- - -
49
44
Card
Col.
!-r-!
o
S12C
C CSO
I.""
M
.... " ....
"
......
----1 :::::
... "
L -;:::-:::' "...
... ,'
"
"""
... "
--
Purpose
EC Level
0
0
I 0
I 0
I 0
ol~
I
R
Q
P
}
N
e---L-e I 0
}
L
K
~
~
I
/
/
o
/
/
/
/
--
/
When plugged. the columns will become
either a one (lIar a zero (01.
-J/
Card location ~ A 1 L2
("2·high" card.)
-e..-r-e
--
1
JlI
I
90-99XXX machines plug for
model of tape unit.
"
"
o
......
Tape Unit Serial Number
Card row
46
I 45 I 44
I
Example
Values
0
~IO
01 ........
..-.
Notes:
[2] For tape units with a high order digit in the serial
number, other than 3 through 8; the diagnostic
will print the original model number as the high
order digit of the serial number.
o
I"'''
0
[ 1] The original model number is the high-order digit
or alpha character in the serial number, and is not
changed with model conversion. See table to
convert alpha to model type.
N P Q R Card Col. (Ref.1
1 1 1 1 ~EC No. 734776
0 0 0 1 ~ EC No. 734801
~ EC No. 735810 or higher
0 0 0
Feature Code
Card Colomn (Ref.)
K L
Basic Densities 6250 only
0 0
6250/1600 bpi
0 1
~
I
,..
/
. . .N'"jJJ,,'" ;y ...~:rT~
39
39
Card
Col.
I
e--I---e
e---t--e
/
Onglnal model number (Models 4,6, and 81 (See Notesl
I
I
Ol~
/
Card row
40
I
/
Plugging example: Wired for model 4.
I
I
/
52
Card row
41
/
L
0
0
1
1
1
1
('
EC Level/Feature Code
/
/
Card
Col.
(~
Alpha
/
Original Model No.
(0 (/
('-
Plugging example: Wired for EC734801 and feature code 6250/1600 bpi.
Tape Model
(Cant'd)
G~5
(~
e----e
0
o I e---L.
--...r-e I 0
......
I
32
1 0
Card row
"'- .......
"'-
51
.......
I
Card
Col.
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
R
Q
P
N
M
L
Plug
Value
Card
Col.
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
R
K
To plug seri al number:
Plug pins to equal the
last four dig its of the
serial number using
chart at left
Plugging ex ample:
Tape unit se rial
number is 8 1060.
J
I
I
.......
4
1 0
Plug
Valve
50
I 49
1024
Q
P
Plug positio ns
to give a su m
of 1060.
N
M
L
K
J
1060
I
I
o Copyright International Business Machines Corporotion 1976. 1979, 1980
[
90-212
(--
90-213
NOTES:
• CopyrAr'~nlern.~~BUSiner't,Chines ~ation )i~, 1979.1"'~
I
'" ___ ) /
'
,I
'
'--... __ ~JV' ,, ____ j/
I
'
)
-" ',. _It
I
;
", _
.iY
90-213/
"~
1',
(' (/
('
A
Abends-Theory 00-035
A/B Read and Sequencing Register 53-055
A Register 52-035
AC Power Supply (see Power Supplies)
Acceptable Waveforms (Read Card Test Points)
5B-004
Access Times, Read/Write (Subsystem
Characteristics) 40-002
Acronyms and Abbreviations PLAN 2
Active/lnactive/ Pulsing /Switched Line
Levels 00-003
Adapter Hose (CE Tool) 80-000'
ADD/ADDM, Arithmetic (ALU Operation) 52-065
Additional Stopping Distance After Go
Extend 6A-140, 6B-205
Address Out Active (MAP)
13-300
Address Out Inactive (MAP) 13-360
Address/Feature/Priority Card Plugging
(Installation) 90-110
Address Decoders, Control Unit 58-010
Addressing .
Concepts 40-003
Tape Control and Tape Unit 54-005
Adjustment
Altitude Vacuum level OS-410, 90-190
AMP Sensor (NRZI-Model 3, 5, 7) 08-300
Amp Sensor (PE Only-Model 3, 5, 7) 08-290
Amplitude (Model 4, 6, 8) 08-310
Autocll;taner OS-3S2, 5B-l10
BOT /EOT, Fiber Optic 08-580
BOT /EOT Voltage 08-575
Capstan To Stubby Bar Clearance
(All Models) OS-080
.
Capstan Tachometer (Model 3, 5, 7) OS-130
Caps~an Tachometer (Model 4, 6, 8)
08-120
Cartrrdge Motor 08-535
Data Flow Clock Asymmetry 90-190
DC Power Supply OS-570
Dual Density Threshold Adjustment Card 80-000
Electrical Skew (NRZI Feature) 08-200
ESD Grounding (3420/3803) 90-190
Head Mirror Stop (Model 3, 5, 7) 08-350
left Reel Hub and Motor 80-560
Mechanical Skew (NRZI Feature) 08-1S0
Mechanical Skew (1600 and 6250 BPI) OS-170
Power Window Safety Bail OS-640
Read Amplitude (Model 4, 6, 8) OS-310
Read Electrical Skew (NRZI Feature) OS-190
Type 2272 MST Card 17-800
Vacuum Column Door 08-6S0
Vacuum Column Door Glass 08-690
Write Electrical Skew (NRZI Feature) 08-200
Pneumatics
.
Pressure Level (All Models) OS-420
Supply Flat Belt (Type 4) 08-442
Power Window Motor, Rack and Switch 08-640
Rack and limit Switch 08-650
Read Amplitude (Models 4,6, S) 08-310
Read Electrical Skew (NRZI) 08-190
Right Reel Hub OS-500
Safety Bail OS-640
Tape Unit Stubby Bar 08-0ao
Write Electrical Skew (NRZI) OS-200
7-Track NRZI Threshold Adjustment Card 08-000
Air Bearings~ MAP 4A-160, 4B-160
c
(
Air Pressure Check, Regulator 08-405, 90-190
Airflow and Voltage Monitoring
System lA-OOO, 1B-OOO
Alignments
Capstan
Dynamic (Non-90,000 series) 08-150
Dynamic (90,000 series) 08-160,
Marks 08-064
Static (Non-90,OOO Series) OS-060
Static (With Round Supports) 08-068
Static (With Square Support Without
Zero Marks) (;8-062
Power Window 08-640
Alternate Flip Flop 53-040
ALU ((Arithmetic logical Unit) Microprocessor))
Operations
Arithmetic Add: ADD/ADDM (Hex Code A or B)
52-065
Branch On Condition: BOC(Hex Code 2 or 3)
52-0S5
Branch to Read from Load Point. 55-040
Branch to Write from Load Point 55-024
Branch Unconditional: BU (Hex Code 6)
52-090
Common Start I/O Routine 55-020
Logical AND: AND/ ANDM (Hex Code C or D)
52-070
logical Exclusive OR: XO/XOM (Hex Code E or F)
52-075
Logical OR: OR/ORM (Hex Code 80r-9)
52-075
.Store Logic: STO (Hex Code 0 or 1) .
52-095
Transfer logic: XFR (Hex Code 4 or 5) 52-100
AlU1
Charts 1 to 7 13-091
Fails to Irap to 000 (MAP) 13-400
Failure to ResetCTI(MAP) 13-210
Hangs at 000 (MAP) 13-010
Hangs on AlU2 Failure (MAP) 13-410
Loop .(MAP) 13-530, 13':'540
loop, TCS (MAP) 13-mm
Microprogram Detected Error. (Sense Byte 11
Bit 4) (MAP) 16-060
'
Op In Wait (MAP) 13-250·
Power-On Reset (MAP) 13-090
Reset Failure (MAP) 13-200
Waiting for ALU2 to Complete a
Sequence (MAP) 13-420
Waiting for AlU2 to Drop STATB (MAP)
13-460, 13-470
.
.
.
Waiting for ALU2 STATB Indication (MAP)
13-450
.
Waiting for ALU2 ST ATD Indication (MAP)
13-440
ALU Cannot Exit or loop (MAP) 13-370.
ALUl or ALU2 Hangs (Chart) 13-005
ALUl or ALU2 Hangs (MAP) 13-000
ALU1/ AlU2 (Two Position Switch) . 75-002
ALU2
Analyzing Microprogram Errors 16-131
Microprogram Detected Error (Sense Byte 12
Bit 4) 16-130
. '
Microprogram Error (Table) 16-130'
Power-On Reset Charts 1 to 7 13-194
Power-On Reset (MAP) 13-190
Trap Failure (MAP)
13~260
B Bus Parity Error AlUl
16-030
B Bus Panty Error AlU2 16-100
Branch On Condition (BOC) Error
ALUl
16-050
AlU2 16-120
Bus In Register, Channel 52-040
Bus Out Register, Tape Unit 52-045
Card Interchanging List 16-001
Channel Bus In (CBI) Register 52-040
Channel Tags In (CT!) Register 52-040
C.ommunication Between Microprocessors
(Description) 52-030
Crossover (XOUTA/XOUTB) Registers 52-025
o Bus Parity Error ALU2 16-110
o Registers 52-060
Diagnose, Loop, and Scoping Procedures
16-000
General Reference Information 16-000
High-Order ROS Registers 52-035
High ROS/IC Parity Error On a Branch Instruction
ALU 1 16-020
.
AlU2 16-090
How to Determine the Failing Address 16-000
How to Make the ALU Loop on an Error 16-000
Linking Microprogram Routines (Description)
. 52-030
listings. Microprocessor (Description) 52-030
local Storage Register (lSR) 52-015
Low-Order ROS Registers 52-035
Low ROS /IC Parity Error On a Branch Instruction
AlUl
16-010
ALU2 16-080
Microprocessor
Clocks 52-005
Instructions (see ALU Operation)
listings .(Description) 52-030
(MP1IMP2) Schematic 50-003
Mjcroprogram Transfer Decodes 52-101
MIST or TeS Register (MP1) 52-060
MPl Spe~ial Register (Hardware Errors) 52-060
MP2 Special Register (TU Bus In) 52-060
Parity Error ALUl
16-040
ROS 1 Trap Conditions 50-011
Secopd Level Diagram, ROS 1 Trap
Conditions 50-01 0
Short Cycl~ XFR Example (Timing Chart) 16-001
Stat Registers. 52-015
Stop Address- FRU List ALU 1 16-060
Stop Address-FRU List ALU2 16-130
Tags In Register, Channel 52-040
Tape Unit Bus Out (IUBD) Register 52-045
or MIST Register (MP1) 52-060
XOUTA/XOUTB (Crossover) Registers 52-025
Amplitude-Setting Sequence 5B-120
Analysis of Damaged Tape Errors 00-012
Analysis of IBG in Developed Tape 00-013
Analyzing Microprogram Errors 16-131
AND, Logical (ALU Operation) 52-070
Arithmetic Add (ALU Operation) 52-065
Array Patching, Patch Card 52-103
Asymmetry Adjustment, Clock 17-800
Attachment, Channel (Chart) 90-010
Autocleaner .
Adjustment 08-3S2
rcs
Erase Head 5B-110
Operation OS-360
Operational Check 08-3S0
Removal/ Replacement OS-370
Solenoid 4B-160
Write Card Circuits 5B-l10
Automated Logic Diagram (A LOs) 00-002
Automatic Threading (Concept) 40-001
B
B Bus
B Bus 0-7 AlUl Test Points (Table) 16-030
Parity Error ALU1 (MAP) 16-030
Parity Error AlU2 (MAP) 16-100
Parity Indicator 75-003
Backhitch 6B-230
Backspace Block Command 40-007
Backspace File Command 40-007
Backspace Operation 6B-230
Backward
No Response or Tape Moves Backward 3A-100
Tape Fails to Go Backward 3A-130,3B-130
Bad Sense Data After a Rewind from OlTs (MAP)
15-140
Basic Recording Techniques (PE, NRZI.
6250) Descriotion 55-007
Basic Subsystem (Concepts) 40-001
BCDIC-EBCDIC Conversion Chart (7-Track
Operation) 57 -020
Bit Cell and PE Waveform 55-007
Bit Cell and NRZI Waveform 55-007
B~t Packing and Scoping Procedure
5A-115,5B-025
Bit Usage Chart, MP I XOUTA Register 52-025
Block Diagram, Device Switching
(2xS Switch) 1S-012
Block Diagram, Device Switching
(3xS or 4xS Switch) 18-013
BOC Indicator 75-003
BOT/EOT
Phototransistor 2A-Ol0
Load Check Prior to BOT Sense 2A-150, 2B-150
Tape Does Not Go Backward or Does Not Stop
at BOT 2A-190
Tape Moves Backward Off Left Reel 2B-190
Tape Unwinds Off Right Reel or TI Light Stays
.
On 3A-150
Tape Won't Thread, Load, and Return to BOT
Correctly 6B-l00
Voltage Checks and Adjustments OS-580
BOT /EOT, Fiber Optics
Block Removal/Replacement 08-590
LED BOT /EOT Window Removal/Replacement
08-590
LED BOT IEOT Voltage Checks/ Adjustments
OS-580
Branch
Condition Error AlU1 (MAP) 16-050
MP1 Condition (Table) 52-086
MP2 Conditions (Tablel 52-0S7
On Condition (ALU Operation) 52-085
On Condition Error AlU2 (MAP) 16-120
INDEX 1
INDEX (Cont'd)
Unconditional (ALU Operation) 52-090
To Write From Load Point 55-024
To Read From Load Point 55-040
Buffer Write Cycle 53-040
Buffers, LSR 52-015
Burst Commands 40-005
Bus In Register. Channel 52-040
Bus In/Bus Out Interface Lines 07-000, 54-000
Bus Out Checks (MAP) 15-030
Bus Out Register, Tape Unit 52-045
Busy (TCS Feature) 58-012
Busy /Tach Lines Test Points (Table) 16-171
Byte Counter 53-025
c
C Compare or P Compare Circuit Logic 17-017
C Compare or P Compare Errors 17-010
C Compare or P Compare Errors (Timing Chart)
17-014
Cable and Terminator Plugging 90-080
Cable Retaining Bar 90-060
Cables 90-060
Cabling. Subsystem 90-060
Capstan
Adjusters 08-060
Adjustment Wrench (CE Tool) 80-000
80x Wrench (CE TooI)80-000
Capstan To Stubby 8ar Clearance 08-080
Drive System 6A-120, 68-200
Dynamic Alignment Tracking (90,00 Series) 08-160
Dynamic Alignment Tracking (Non-90,00
Series) 08-150
Glazed Cleaning Procedure 08- 700
Major Elements of Capstan Control logic 6B-205
Motion Checks (Motion Appears Normal) 68-020
Motion Control 6A-OOO
Motion Failure Symptoms 68-000, 68-140
Motor and Controls 6A-120, 68-200
Motor Proportional Drive Control 68-215
Motor Status 3A-030, 38-030
Motor Waveforms 6A-002
Normal Cleaning Procedure 85-004
Pulse Generator 6A-120, 68-200
Start Capstan Motion (Write Operation
200 IPS) 68-220
Capstan Assembly
Field Repair, Dented Capstans (Non-90,000
Series TU) 08-020
Field Repair, Dented Capstans (90,000 Series
TU) 08-030
Removal (Non-90,000 Series Tape Units) 08-020
Removal (90,000 Series Tape Units) 08-030
Replacement (Non-90,000 Series Tape Units)
08-040
Replacement (90,00 Series Tape Units) 08-050
Starts Turning When Power is Turned On
(Second Level) 68-140
Static Alignment (Square Support With Zero
Marks) 08-064
Static Alignment (Square Support
Without Zero Marks) 08-062
Static Alignment (With Round Supports) 08-068
Capstan Tachometer
Check / Adustment (Models 3, 5. and 7) 08-130
INDEX 2
Check/Adjustment (Models 4,6, and 8) 08-120
Cleaning 08-140
Cleaning Kit 85-000
Cleaning Procedure. Special Glazed 08-700
Control Circuits. Capstan 6A-120,6B-200
Drive System 6A-120,6B-200
Dynamic Alignment (Non-90.ODD Series Tape Units)
08-150
Dynamic Alignment (90.000 Series Tape Units)
08-160
Extended Go 6A-14O. 6B- 205
Gray Code Counter (GCC) 68-205
IBG Counter Circuits 6A-130, 6B-205
Major Elements of Capstan Control Logic 68-205
Motion Checks (Capstan Motion Appears Normal)
68-020
Motion Control Problems 6A-DOD
Motion Failure Problems 68-000
Motor and Controls
6A-120. 68-200
Motor Proportional Drive Control Circuit 68-215
Motor Waveforms 6A-002, 68-002
Polarity Hold Drive (PHD) Register 68-205
Proportional Drive Counter (PDC) 6B-205
Pulse Generation 6A-120.68-200
Quarter Tach Pulses 68-205
Read Only Storage (ROS) 68-205
Start Capstan Motion 68-220
Starts Turning When Power is Turned On 68-140
Static Alignment
(With Round Supports) 08-068
(90,000 Series. With Zero Marks) 08-062
(90.000 Series. Without Zero Marks) 08-064
Tach Period Counter (TPC) 68-205
Tape Unit Loads But Capstan Motion is Faulty
6B-l10
TU Stubby Bar Clearance Adjustment 08-080
TU Won't Thread, Load and Return to BOT Correctly
6B-l00
Won't Start Rewind to LP After Tape Load 28-175
6 MHz Oscillator and GCC 68-205
Capstan Prealignment Gauge (CE Tools) 80-000
Card / Board Function Layout
(3420) 19-010
(3803-2) 19-000
Card Isolation Technique PLAN 1
Card Plugging (Installation) 90-110
Card Plugging, Tape Control Logic Panel 19-000
Cartridge
Does Not Open 2A-100, 2B-100
Opener Does Not Close 4A-150.48-150
Optional (Concept) 40-001
Motor Replacement/ Adjustment 08-535
Restraint Pressure Check 08-536
Restraint Removal/Replacement 08-540
CE Initial Entry Flow Chart START 1
CE Panel
Description 75-001
Failures 12-020
Operation Contents (MAP) 12-010
Switches 75-001
Channel
Attachment (Chart) 90-01 0
Buffer Controls 53-030
Buffer Logic 50-000
Bus In 53-055
Bus In Register 52-040
Clocks/ Oscillators / Counters
Byte Counter 53-025
CRIC-CROC Address Counters 53-035
Data Flow Clock 53-015
Group Buffer Counter 53-090
Master Clock 53-005
Microsecond Frequency 53-005
Oscillator Gating 53-005
Read Clock Stepping Pulses 53-005
Read/Write Clocks and Counters (Table) 53-010
Write Clock and Write Counter 53-020
Column Vacuum Check 08-400
Command Controls Switches (CE Panel) 75-002
Command or Control Status Reject 16-160,
6A-160
Command Out Inactive During Reset or
Power On Reset (MAP) 13-330
Command Out Tag Active (MAP) 13-290
Command Reject (MAP) 15-020.
Command Select Sequencer and Decoder 12-026
Command Sequence (MAP) 13-050
Command Status Reject (MAP) 16-160
Commands and Instructions
8urst Commands 40-005
I/O Instructions 40-009
Motion Control Commands 40-007
Non-Motion Control Commands 40-008
Common Start I/O (510) Routine 55-020
Communication 8etween Microprocessors
(Description) 52-030
Communicator Feature, Device Switch 18-010
Communicator (2X8 Switching) 58-080
Compare Equal Indicator (CE Panel) 75-003
Compare Errors, P Compare or C Compare 17-010
Compare Errors. P Compare or C Compare
17-014
(Timing Chart)
Concepts, 3803-2/3420 40-003
Configuration Worksheet Instructions 90-030
Configurations. Subsystem (Concepts)
40-003, 90-100
Contingent Connection (TCS Feature) 58-012
Control Burst 40-002
Control Check Indicators (CE Panel) 75-003 .
Control Status Reject (MAP) 16-210
Control Unit (see Tape Control)
Common Start I/O (510) 55-020
Sense and Status 8yte Table 00-005
Control Unit End (TCS Feature) 58-012
Conversion, Field Tester 90-170
Conversion Table, Sense 8yte to Bit 14-005
Cooling Fan Assembly Removal/Replacement 08-630
Cooling System (see Voltage and Airflow
Monitoring System)
Counter (lC)' Microprocessor 1 Flow Logic 52-010
Counters (see Clocks/Oscillators/Counters)
8us In/Out Checking (MAP) 13-380
Initial Selection 54-ODD
Interface Problems, Tape Control 18-040
Priority Circuits 54-020
Status Word 8its (Table) 15-080
Tags In Register 52-040
Test Points (Table) 17-021
Write Byte Register 53-045
Characteristics, 3420 Subsystem 40-002
Chart
ALU1 1 to 7 13-091
ALU2 Power On Reset 13-194
8ranch Conditions 16-050
Cards and Cables, Device Switching
Troubleshooting Procedure 18-028
Dropping Ready and Thread and Load Failure
2A-OOO
Features Chart (Sense 8yte 6) 17-220
Mode Chart (Sense Byte 6) 17-110.17-220
Read/Write Vertical Redundancy Check 17-170
Reference 18-029
Skew Error Test Points 17-162
Tape Control To/From Device 18-005
Tape Unit Control Lines 16-213
1x8 Selection 18-001. 18-005
Checks
Autocleaner Operational 08-380
80T /EOT Voltage 08-580
Capstan Tachometer
(Model 4, 6, 8) 08-120
(Model 3, 5, 7) 08-130
Capstan and Tracking 08-010
Cartridge Restraint Pressure 08-536
Cleaner 81ade Gauss 08-390
Column Vacuum Level 08-400
DC Power Supply 08-570
Erase Head Polarity and Erasure 08-320
ESD Grounding (3420/3803) 90-190
Feedthrough 08-330
File Protect Mechanism 08-340
Mechanical Skew
1600 and 6250 08-170
NRZI Feature 08-180
Pneumatic Pressure Vacuum 08-400
Power Supply 90-180. 08-570
Read/Write Head Resistance (Model 4, 6, 8)
08-280
Regulator Air Pressure 08-405, 90-190
Tape Guide (NRZI Feature) 08-230
Tape Unit Grounding 08-600
Threading Vacuum 08-400
Transfer Valve Plug 08-410
Vacuum Column Switch 08-450
Vacuum Pump 8elt 08-410
Check Register, Write 53-045
Checking. Read 8ack (Concept) 40-001
Cleaner 81ade Gauss Check 08-390
Cleaning Procedures (see Preventive Maintenance)
Clock
Asymmetry Adjustment 17 - 800
Chart 53-015
Check (MAP) 17-800
Control Logic, Microprocessor 52-005
Write (Table) 53-020
INDEX 2
gic) 17-112
No Response or Tape Moves 8ackward 3A-100,
3B-100
NRZI Read Data Flow 57-006
Oscillator Gating 53-005
Overrun 15-042
P or C Compare 17 -017
Power Window Does Not Go Down 4A-14O,
4B-14O
Proportional Drive Control 6B-215
Read Cycle Controls 53-095
Read Data Converter 57 -026
Read Data Flow 50-002
Read Head and Read Card 5B-120
Read Sequencing and AI B Registers 53-055
Read Translator 57-021
Read /Write Flow 50-000
Read /Write VRC Circuit 17-179
Ready Lamp Does Not Turn Off 4A-100, 4B-1oo
Ready Lamp Does Not Turn On/Window Does
Not Close 2A-210, 2B-210
Reel and Capstan Operation during Rewind
3A-030, 38-030
Reel Drive System 3b-020
RIC/ROC 53-081
Right or Left Reel Fails To Load Tape
Into Column 28-180
Right Reel Does Not Turn Clockwise at
Threading Speed 2A-120, 2B-120
ROS/LSR 52-015
ROS Mode Switch and Gates 12-024
ROS 1 Trap Conditions 50-01 0
Skew Detection 53-085
System 360/370 Switching (Data In
Handling) 58-005
Tape Does Not Enter or Stay in High Speed
Rewind or Rewinds To BOT at High Speed
3A-170, 3B-170
Store 52-095
Tape Does Not Go Backward or Does Not
Stop at BOT 2A-190
Tape Does Not Load Into Either
Column 2A-160, 28-160
Tape Does Not Pull Out of Columns
Properly During Unload Rewind 4A-120, 4B-120
Tape Does Not Stop or Tape Runaway
(Forward or Backward 3A-14O, 38-140
Tape Does Not Wind Completely Onto Right
Reel or Reels Do Not Stop 4A-130, 48-130.
Tape Fails To Go 8ackward 3A-130, 3B-130
Tape Goes Forward After Loading Into
Vacuum Columns 2A-200, 2B-2oo
Tape Moves Backward Off Left Reel, or
Tape Unit Performs a Normal Unload
Rewind During Load Operation 2B-190
Tape Pulls Out, Dumps, or Has Wide
Excursions in Left Column During High
Speed Rewind 3A-160, 38-160
Tape Threads Into Threading Channel and
Stops 2A-14O. 2B-140
Tape Threads Into Right Column 2B-130
Tape Unit Bus Out (TUBO) Register 52-045
Tape Unit Selection Priority 54-010
Tape Unwinds Off Right Reel 3A-150, 3B-150
TCS Selection and Tie Breaker 58-030
Transfer 52-100
Transfer Valve Does Not Pick or
Pneumatic Motor Not Running 2A-130
Two-Channel Switch 58-010
Two-Channel Switch and Tie Breaker 58-030
Unload Rewind Pushbutton (No Response)
4A-110, 48-110
Write 53-070
Clock and Write Counter 53-020
Data Converter 57 -025
Data Flow 50-001
Group Buffer Control 53-C.:!5
Write Head, Erase Head, ano Write Card
5B-110
Service Controls 53-040
Translator 57-020
Triggers 53-070
Trigger VRC
17-026
2x8 Switching Functional Units 58-080
Logic Panel Removal/Rf,lplacement (3803/3420)
08-630
Logic, Pins, Cross Reference List 20-000
Logic Section (2X8 Switching) 58-080
Logical AND (ALU Operation) 52-070
Logical Exclusive OR (ALU Operation) 52-080
Logical OR (ALU Operation) 52-075
Long Cycle BOC or BU Example (Timing Chart)
16-001
Loop,ALU1 (MAP) 13-530, 13-540
loop Write-to-Read (LWR) Command
40-006, 55-005
Tape Unit Operation' 55-005
Low-Order ROS Registers 52-035, 16-010
Low ROS/IC Parity Error on a Branch Condition
(ALU2) (MAP) 16-080
Low ROS/IC Parity Error on a Branch Instruction
(ALU1) (MAP) 16-010
Low Speed Rewind 3A-010, 3B-Ol0
LWR Tape Unit Operation 55-005
Schedule 85-005
Tape Unit Cleaning Procedure 85-001
Maintenance Philosophy, Introduction PLAN 1
Major Elements of Capstan Control Logic 6B-205
Make the ALU Loop on an Error (Procedure) 16-000
MAPs
Address Out Tag Active 13-300
ALU Cannot Exit or Loop 13-370
ALU1
Cannot Transfer 13-130
Fails to Trap to 000 13-400
Failure to Reset CTI 13-210
Hangs at 000 13-010
Hangs on ALU2 Failure 13-410
Loop 13-530, 13-540
Loop, TCS 13-080
Microprogram Detected Error (Sense
Byte 11, Bit 4) 16-060
Op In Wait 13-250
Power On Reset 13-090
Reset Failure 13-200
Waiting 13-110. 13-140, 13-170
Waiting for ALU2 to Complete a
Sequence 13-420
Waiting for AlU2 to Drop STATB
13-460.
13-470
Waiting for ALU2 STATB Indication 13-450
Waiting for ALU2 STATD Indication 13-440
Waiting for End of Data (EOD) on Write 13-520
ALU1 or ALU2 Hangs 13-·)()()
ALU2
Power On Reset 13-190
Trap Failure 13-260
8 Bus Parity Error (ALU 1) 16-030
B Bus Parity Error (ALU2)
16-100
Bad Sense After a Rewind from OLTs 15-140
Branch Condition Error ALU1
16-050
Branch On Condition Error (ALU2) 16-120
Bus Out Checks 15-030
Capstan Motion Control 6A-OOO, 6B-000
CE Panel Operation 12-010
Channel Bus In/Out Checking 13-380
Clock Check 17-800
Command or Control St3tus Reject 6A-160
Command Out Inactive During Reset or
Power On Reset 13-330
Command Out Reject 15-020
Command Out Tag Active
Command Sequence 13-050
Command Status Reject 16-160
Control Status Reject 16-200
CU E Reset on Interface B 13-500
Cyclic Redundancy Checks 17-540
o Bus Parity Error
ALU1
16-040
ALU2 16-110
M
Magnetic Tape and Reels (Concepts) 40-002
Preventive Maintenance
General Cleantng Instructions 85-000
3803·2/3420
INDEX 5
INDEX (Cont'd)
Data Converter Check 15-070
Device Switching Feature
Most Probable Cause Analysis 18-015
Troubleshooting Procedure 18-020
Dropping Ready and Thread and Load
Failure Symptoms 2A-000, 2B-000
Dynamic Reversal 16-200
Early Begin Readback Check 17 -100
End Data Check 17-530
End Of Call 00-030
Envelope Check Without Skew Error 17-220
Envelope Failure, Runaway, or Read/Write
Problems 5A-000, 5B-000
Error Correction Sense Analysis 21-000
File Protect Indicator Off or Power
Check Indicator On 1A-COO, 1B-OOO
Formats 00-001
High ROS/IC Register Parity Branch Condition
ALU1
16-020
ALU2 16-090
How to Use 00-000
IBG Detected on Write 17-080
10 Burst Check
17-050
Intervention Required 15-010
LRCR Errors, Sense Byte 3, Bits 0, 1,
or 4 17-310
Low ROS/IC Parity Error on a Branch Condition
(ALU2) 16-080
Low ROS/IC Parity Error on a Branch Instruction
(ALU1) 16-010
MTE Without Envelope Check 17 -110
No Block Detected on Write/Write Tape Mark
(WTM) 16-190
Noise Detection 17-370
Not Capable 15-060
NRZI Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 17-590
Offline Duplication of Online Failures 12-000
Overrun 15-040
P Compare or C Compare Errors 17 -010
Partial Record (Sense Byte 5, Bit 5) i 7 -410
PE or NRZI and GCR Velocity Checks/Changes
16-180
Permanent Data Checks 5A-105, 5B-002
Picking/Dropping Records 15-200
Pointer System 17-602
Postamble Error 17 -190
Read/Write Vertical Redundancy Check (VRC)
17-168
Sense All Zeros 15-080
Sense Analysis 14-000
Service Out Tag Active 13-280
Single Tape Unit Problems 00-040
SIO Trap Failures 13-320
Slow End Readback Check 17 -150
Start Read Check 17-070
Suppress Out Active 13-310
Suppress Out Inactive During Reset or
Power On Reset 13-340
TACH Start Failure (Sense Byte 10, Bit 5)
16-170
TACH Velocity Error 13-510
Tape Control Metering Problems 18-060
Tape Control Power Supply 11-000
Tape Motion and Rewind Symptoms 3A-COO,
38-000
Tape Unit Loads but Capstan Motion is
INDEX 6
Faulty 68-110
Tape Unit Wont Thread, Load, and Return
to BOT Properly 68-101
Unit Check Without Supporting Sense
or Unexpected Sense 15-100
Unload Failure Symptoms 4A-000, 48-000
Write Current Failure or Tape Unit Check 15-090
Write Tape Mark (WTM) Check 17-180
Write Trigger Vertical Redundancy Check
(VRC) Error 17 -020
.
XOUTA hegister Not FU[lctioning 13-430
1x8 Selection Logic 18-000
301 Trap Address, TCS or Device Switching
Without TCS 13-240
3420/3803 Symptom Index 00-010
3803 Status Pending 13-220
6250 Error Correction 17-600
Markers, BOT / EOT 40-007
Master Clock 53-005
Master Signal level Tapes (CE Tool) 80-000
Master Skew Tapes (CE Tools) 80-000
Mechanical Skew (Installation) 90-190
Mechanical Skew Check/Adjustment, NRZI Featured
Units 08-180
Mechanical Skew Check / Adjustment, 1600 and 6250
BPI Units 08-170
Meter, Torque
Metering (Concepts) 40-003
Metering Problems, Tape Control 18-060
Microprocessor (see also ALU)
Card Interchange List 16-001
Clock Control Logic 52-005
Communication Between ALU1 and ALU2
(Description) 52-030
Diagnose, Loop, and Scoping Procedures 16-000
Functions (Description) 52-030
Instruction Counter Logic 52-010
Instruction Format 52-030
Listings (Description) 52-030
Stat Registers 52-015
Microprogram Address, Used in MAPs
(Description) 00-003
Microprogram Detected Error, ALU1 (MAP) 16-060
Microprogram Error, ALU2 (Table) 16-130
Microprogram Error Labels (Table) 16-060
Microprogram Errors, Analyzing (Table) 16-131
Microprogram Flowcharts
Branch to Read From Load Point 55-040
Branch to Write From Load Point 55-024
Common Start I/O Routine 55-020
Microprogram Indicators 75-004
Microsecond Frequency 53-005
Minireel Load Test 08-800
Missing or Extr., Interrupts 18-050
MIST or TCS Register (MP1) 52-035, 52-060
MLM Tab Placement by Volume PLAN 7
Mode Chart for Sense Byte 6 17-220
Mode Set Command Table 40-008
Mode Set 1 (7-Track NRZI) Operation 55-007
Mode Set 2 (9-Track PE/NRZI) Operation 55-007
Modified Power Supply, 3420 1A-002
Motion Control Commands 40-007
Motion Control Commands (Table) 40-005
Motion Problems, Tape (Stubby Column Loops)
6A-010
Mot In Tester (see Field Tester)
Mple/Single Switch (CE Panel) 75-002
MP1 (see ALU)
A-Register 52-035
Branch Conditions (Table) 52-086
Clock Control Logic 52-005
Clock Timing Charts 52-005
Functional Description 52-030
High-Order ROS Registers 52-035
Instruction Counter Logic 52-025
low-Order ROS Registers 52-035
Schematic 50-003
Special Register (Hardware Errors) 52-060
Stat Registers 52-015
Transfer Decodes (Table) 52-101
XOUTA Register Bit Usage 52-025
MP2 (see ALU)
A-Register 52-035
Branch Conditions (Table) 52-087
Functional Description 52-030
High-Order ROS Registers 52-035
Instructional Counter Logic 52-030
low-Order ROS Registers 52-035
Schematic 50-003
Special Register (TU Bus In) 52-040
Stat Registers 52-01 5
Transfer Decodes (Table) 52-101
XOUTA Register Bit Usage 52-025
Multi-Track Error (MTE)
logic 17-112
MTE/LRC Indicator 75-004
Without Envelope Check (MAP) 17-110
N
9-Track NRZI (Concepts) 40-002
9-Track NRZI Feature (Tape Control) 40-004
No Block Detected on Write/Write Tape Mark
(WTM 16-190
No-Operation (NOP) Command 40-008
No Response or Tape Moves Backward 3A-100,
3B-100
No Response When Rewind/Unload Button is
Pressed 4A-110, 4B-110
Noise Detection (MAP) 17-370
Noise or Bits in the Interblock Gap 5A-115, 5B-025
Non-Motion Control Commands 40-008
Non-Motion Control Commands (Table) 40-005
Not Capable (MAP) 15-060
Not Capable Conditions (Table) 15-064
NRZI
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) (MAP) 17-590
Hi-Clip VRC (Write Only) 17-310
Read Data Bit x Test Points (Table) 17-590
Read Data Flow 57 -006
R/W VRC, Hi Clip VRC, LRC Error 17-314
7-Track (Concepts) 40-002
9-Track (Concepts) 40-002
o
Offline Duplication of Online Failures (MAP) 12-001
OLT Error Messages Analysis 21-000
OlT-3420 F, G,H, Error Sense Analysis 21-000
One and Two Track 6250 Error Correction 17-600
Online and Offline Status (Concepts) 40-003
Operation, Autocleaner 08-360
Operational Check, Autocleaner 08-380
Operations, ALU
Arithmetic Add: ADD/ ADDM (Hex Code A or B)
52-065
Branch On Condition: BOC (Hex Code 2 or 3)
52-085
Branch to Read from Load Point 55-040
Branch to Write from Load Point 55-024
Branch Unconditional: BU (Hex Code 6)
52-090
Common Start I/O Routine 55-020
Logical AND: AND/ ANDM (Hex Code C or D)
52-070
Logical Exclusive OR: XO/XOM (Hex Code E or F)
52-075
Logical OR: OR/ORM (Hex Code 8 or 9)
52-075
Store Logic: STO (Hex Code 0 or 1)
52-095
Transfer Logic: XFR (Hex Code 4 or 5) 52-100
Operator Panel Switches (2X8 Switch
Logic) 58-055
Optional Tape Cartridge (Concept) 40-001
ORC Byte 53-045
Organization of Publication PLAN 6
Oscillator Gating 53-005
Oscillators (see Clocks/Oscillators/Counters)
Other (Related) Subsystem Documents PLAN 1
Overrun
Error 53-040
MAP 15-040
PE and 6250 BPI (Timing Chart) 15-041
p
P Compare Error Test Points (Table) 17..,013
P Comp Indicator (CE Panel) 75-004
P Compare or C Compare (Logic) 17-017
P Compare or C Compare Errors (MAP) 17 -010
Panel, CE 75-001
Panel Enable Switch 75-001
Parity Error, B Bus, ALU1
16-030
Parity Error, B Bus, AlU2 16-100
Parity Indicator 75-003
Partial Record (MAP) 17-410
Partitioning (TCS Feature) 58-011
Passing Times per Byte (3420 Subsystem
Characteristics) 40-002
Passing Times, IBG (Subsystem Characteristics)
40-002
Patch Card
AlU 1 / ALU2 Card Location 52-104
General Description 52-103
Card Plugging Layout 52-104
PE or NRZI and GCR Velocity Checks/Changes (MAP)
16-180
PE Threshold Adjustment Card 80-000
PE, 1600 BPI (Concepts) 40-002
PE/6250 BPI CRC 17-540
Permanent Data Checks (MAP) 5A-105, 5B-002
Permanent Read Error Scoping Offline 00-013
Permanent Read Error Scoping Online 00-014
Permanent Read/Write Error Analysis
Flow Chart 00-011
3803-2/3420
INDEX 6
.~.
j
)
o
\
J
\" .;/
( c,
(~(:
,(~:,
('
c
(
INDEX (Cont'd)'
Permit Flip Latch 53-040
Persistent Pointers 17 -602
Phase Encoded (PE) 55-007
Phase Pointers (Table) 08-250
Phasing Check (Installation) 90-180
Phasing, Power 90-180
Photo Cell, Radius Sensor 08-610
Picking/Dropping Records (MAP) 15-200
Pins to Logic, Cross Reference List
(3803-2) 20-000
Plugging, Cables and Terminators 90-060
Plugging, Reverse High POwer Drive Current
To Capstan (Model 7 Only) 6A-140
Plugging, Write Head Card (Model 4, 6, 8) 08-270
Pneumatic System
Imbalance or Leaks Check 6A-010, SB-150
Motor Does Not Turn Off 4A-160,4B-1S0
Motor Not Running or Transfer Valve Not Picked
2A-130,2B-130
Motor Stepped Pulley Alignment (Type 3 Supply)
08-434
Pressure Level Adjustment (All Models) 08-420
Pressure/Vacuum Checks 08-400
Procedure to Check for Imbalance or Leaks SA-Ol0
Regulator Air Pressure Check 08-405
Supply Flat Belt Replacement/ Adjustment 08-442
Supply Pulley Removal/Replacement 08-430
System, Description
Air Bearing 4A-160, 4B-160
Flow Diagram 4A-161,4B-161
Pnematic Switches 4A-1S0, 4B-160
Three-Way Valve 4A-160,4B-160
Transfer Valve 4A-160,4B-1S0
Transfer Valve Leakage Test 08-400
Transfer Valve Not Picked 2A-130
Fainter System
MAP 17-S02
Pointer Register (Second Level) 53-045
Probe List (Table) 17-701
Timing Chart 17-702
Polarity Hold Drive (PHD) Register SB-205
Possible 3420/3803 Problem Fix 00-050
Postamble Error (MAP) 17-190
Power
Cable 90-060
Check Indicator On lA-ooo, 1 B-ooo
Supply Checks (Installation) 90-180
Power-On Checks (Installation) 90-180
Power-On/Off Sequencing (Concepts) 40-003
Power On Reset 50-011
Reel Motor Voltages, Speed 3A-020, 3B-020
Requirements, Special-3420 Model 8
(Table) 90-180
Power Supplies
DC Checks/Adjustments 08-570
DC Test Points (3803/3420 Tables) 08-570
Modified 1A-002
Printed Circuit 80ard Removal/Replacement
(3803 Model 2 Only) 08-575
TCU Power Supply Failure Analysis 11-000
Unmodified lA-ooo, 1 B-002
3420 lA-OOO, lB-ooo
3420 Power Interface Board, Bl
lA-003, 1B-OOl
Power Window
.
Alignment 08-640
Does Not Go Down 4A-14O, 4B~14O
Glass Removal/Replacement 08-S70
Rack, Switch A :ljustment 08-S50
Safety Bail Adjustment 08-640
Safety Bail Cable Removal/Replacement 08-SS0
Preamps (see Ajustment)
Pressure, Air (see Pneumatic System)
Pressure Divider (CE Tool) 80-000
Pressure Test, Right Reel Latch
Rear Housing 08-520
Pressure/Vacuum Gauge 80-010
Preventive Maintenance
Fiber Optic Lamp Cleaning Procedure 08- 2S0
General 85-000
Schedule 85-005
Tape Unit Cleaning Procedure 85-001
Priority, Select Out 90-120
Priority (2X16 Switch Logic) 58-060
Procedures
Capstan Motion Checks (Motion Appears Normal)
SB-020
Check for Tape Drag 6A-Ol0
Diagnosing CE Panel Failure 12-020
Displaying Sense Information from CE Panel
12-012
Locating a Failing Command 12-010
Offline Duplication of Failures 12-000
Priority Circuits 54-020
Priority (see Selection and Priority)
Problems, Intermittent Drop Ready 2A-005
Proportional Drive Control, Capstan Motor
(Second Level) 6B-215 .
Proportional Drive Counter (PDC) 6B- 205
Protection, File (Concept) 40-001
Pulse Generator, Capstan 6A-120
Push buttons (see CE Panel Switches)
Q
Quick Fix Index. 3803-2 Subsystem
00-009
R
Radius Sensor Photo Cell 08~610
Read
Acceptable Waveforms (Read Card Test
.
Points 5B-004
Access Times (3420 Subsystem
Characteristics) 40-002
Amplitude Adjustment (Model 4. 6, and 8) 08-310
Back Checking (Concept) 40-001
Backspace Operation 6B-230
Backward Command 40-005
Backward Operation 5A-14O,5B-140
Card Reference Generator 5B-120
Cycle Controls 53-095
Data Converter Data Flow Logic 57 -026
Data Flow Logic 50-002
Data Flow Logic, NRZI 57-006
Errors. Permanent (see Permanent Read
Error Analysis)
Forward to Backward Ratio Test (All Models)
08-240, 5B-020
Forward. to Backward Ratio Test (Models 3, 5, 7)
5A-110
.
.
Forward Command 40-005
Forward Operation 5A-14O, 5B-14O
Head and Read Card Circuits 5B-120
Noise or Bits in the Interblock Gap 5A-115
Operation 5B -140
Register, A/ B 53-055
. Translator Data Flow Logic 57-021
VRC Indicator 75-004
6250 Service Requirements 50-030
Read Card Reference Generator 5B -120
Read Card Test Points (Table) 08-310
Read Electrical Skew Adjustment (NRZI Feature) 08-190
Read Head and Read Card Logic 5B-120
Read Only Storage (ROS) 6B-205
Read Only Tape Generation 90-200
Read Sequencing Circuits 53-055
Read/Write
.
Clocks and Counters (Table) 53-010
Clocks/Oscillators 53-005
CRC A. B, C. 0
53-0S6
CRC Generators 53-065
Cyclic Redundancy Check Generation and Use
53-067
Data Flow Clock 53-015
Data Flow LogiC 50-000. 50-001, 50-002
Envelope Failure, Runaway, or Read/Write Problems
5A-OOO, 5B-000
Head Degaussing and Resistance Check (Models 4,
6, and 8) 08-280
Head Resistance Check Procedure 5B-ool
Intermittent Permanent Data Checks
Bit Packing 5A-115, 5B-025
Forward to Backward Ratio 5A-l10, 5B-020
Noise or Bit In I BG 5A-115, 5B-025
Signal Dropout 5A-l10, 5B-020
Tape Edge Damage 5A-110. 5B-030
Tape Slipping 5B-020
Tape Stretch 5A-115, 5B-020
Logic Circuits 5A-1oo. 5B-loo
Problems 5A-OOO, 5B-000
Self Adjusting Gain Control (SAGC) 5B-120
Skew Detection 53-085
Vertical Redundancy Check (VRC) (Logic) 17-179
. Vertical Redundancy Check (VRC) (MAP)
(Chart) 17-168, 17-170
Vertical Redundancy Check (VRC) (Timing
Charts) 17 -172
VRC Circuit (Logic) 17-179
Write Clock and Write Counter 53-020
Write Head Card Plugging (Models 4. 6, and 8)
08-270
Write Service Controls 53-040
Zero Threshold 5B-120
Ready Lamp Does Not Turn Off 4A-loo, 4B-loo
Ready Lamp Does Not Turn On/Window Does
Not Close 1A-210, 2B-210
Ready Symptoms Failure Chart 2A-OOO
Recording Methods/Formats
Concepts 40-002
Description 55-007
Interblock Gap (lBG) 40-002
Magnetic T~pe amd Reels (Concepts) 40-002
Nine-Track NRZI (Concepts) 40-002
PE (1600 BPI) Concepts 40-002
(~
7-Track NRZI (Concepts) 40-002
S250 BPI (Concepts) 40-002
6250 BPI Error Correction (Concepts)
(, C
(-~'
INDEX 7
40-002
Reel
Alignment Tool Preparation Kit 08-460
Alignment Tool Modification/Zeroing 08-465
And Capstan Operations During Rewind 3A-030,
3B-030
Left Reel Does Not Turn Clockwise at Threading
Speed 2A-ll0. 2B-110·
Motors and Drivers 3A-020, 3B-020
Reel and Capstan Operations During Rewind
3A-030, 38-030
Reel Does Not Stop 4A-130,4B-130
Reel Motor and Hub Adjustment (CE Tools) 80-000
Reel Tachometers 3A-030, 3B-030
Rewind Operation and Timing Chart 3A-01 O.
3B-010
Right or Left Reel Won't Load Tape into Column
2B-180
Right Reel Does Not Stop 4A-130, 4B-130
Right Reel Does Not Turn Clockwise at Correct
Speed 2A-120, 2B-120
Right Reel Latch Rear Housing Pressure
Check 08-520
Stabilization 3A-020, 3B-020
Tachometer Removal/Replacement 08-550
Tachometers. During Rewind 3A-030,
3B-020. 3B-030
Tape Does Not Wind Completely Onto Right Reel
4A-130. 4B-130
Tape Fails to Go Backward 3A-130. 3B-130
Tape Unwinds Off Right Reel or TI Light Stays On
3A-150, 3B-150
Reference Charts. Device Switching Feature 18-029
Registers
A/B 53-055
Channel Tags and Bus In 52-040
Channel Write Byte 53-045
Crossovers 52-025
D 52-060
Dead Track 53-075
High and Low-Order ROS 52-035
Local Storage 52-015
MIST and TCS 52-060
MP1 and MP2 52-060
MPl /MP2 STAT 52-015
Pointer 53-045
ROS/LSR 5:::-015
Tape Unit Bus Out 52-045
Write Check 53-045
Regulator Air Pressure Checks/Adjustments
90-190. 08-405
INDEX 7
INDEX (Cont'd)
INDEX 8
ROS Bit P2, 8-15 Test Points (Table) 16-010
ROS Mode Switch (CE Panel) 75-002
ROS Patch Card (Plugging) SO-030
ROS 1 Trap Conditions logic 50-010
Routines. linking Microprogram 52-030
Rules and Definitions, Device Switching 18-011
Runaway
Envelope Failure, Runaway, or R/W Problems
5A-OOO, 5B-000
Tape Does Not Stop or Tape Runaway (FWD/BKWD)
3A-14O, 3B-14O
or Backward) 3A-14O, 38-140
Tape Fails to Go Backward 3A-130, 38-130
Tape Pulls Out Of or Dumps During High
Speed Rew 3B-160
Tape Rewinds Off left Ree13B-18O
Tape Rewinds to Beginning of Tape at High
Speed 3A-170
Tape Stays in High Speed Rewind Status
to load Point 3B-180
Tape Unwinds off Right Reel 3A-150, 3B-150
Unload/Rewind Pushbutton (No Response)
4A-110, 4B-110
Wide Execursions in left Column During
High Speed Rewind 3A-160, 38-160
Rewind Times (Subsystem Characteristics) 40-002
Rewind/Unload (RUN)
Command 40-007
Concepts 40-001
Unload Operation With Cartridge 4A-OOO, 48-000
Unload Operation Without Cartridge 4A-OOO,
4B-000
Problems 4A-ooo,4B-000
Cartridge Opener Does Not Close 4A-160,
48-150
No Response When Rewind/Unload Button
is Pressed 4A-110, 4B-11 0
Power Window Does Not Go Down 4A-14O,
4B-14O
Reels Do Not Stop 4A-130, 4B-130
Tape Does Not Pull Out of Columns Properly
During Unload Rewind 4A- 120, 4B- 120
Tape Does Not Wind Completely onto Right
Reel or Reels Does Not Stop 4A-130.4B-130
Tape Moves 8ackward Off left Reel 2B-190
Tape Unit Performs a Normal Unload Rewind
During a load Operation 28- 190
Unload Rewind Pushbutton (No Response)
4A-1 10, 4B-110
Rewind/Unload Times (Subsystem Characteristics)
40-002
RIC/ROC 53-080
Right Reel
Does Not Turn Clockwise at Correct
Speed 2A-120, 2B-120
Hub Individual Parts Replacement 08-490
Hub Removal 08-4S0
Hub Replacement/Adjustment 08-500
latch
Rear Housing Pressure Test 08-520
Rear Housing Removal 08-470
Rear Housing Replacement 08-510
Logic 3A-030, 38-030
Motor Removal/Replacment 08-530
Motor Speed, Voltages 3A-020, 38-020
Reels Do Not Stop 4A-130,4B-130
Right or left Reel Won't load Tape into Column
28-1S0
Tape Does Not Wind Completely onto Right Reel
4A-130, 48-130
Tape Unwinds Off Right 'Reel or TI light Stays On
3A-150, 38-150
Theory, Rewind and Timing Chart 3A-010, 3B-010
Won't load Tape into Columnn 2B-180
Right Threading Channel OS- 230
Ripple/Wr Data Switch (CE Panel) 75-002
ROS Bit P1, 0-7 Test Poims (Table) 16-020
Ramovals and Replacements
Air Bearings (D) 08-210
Autocleaner 08-370
Capstan Assembly (Non-90,ooo Series) 08-020,
08-040
Capstan Assembly (90,000 series) 08-030,
08-050
Capstan Tachometer (Model 3, 5, 7) 08-110
Capstan Tachometer (Model 4, 6) 08-090
Cartridge Restraint 08-540
Cooling Fan 08-630
D-Bearing 08-210
Erase Head 08-250
Fiber Optics
BOT/EOT Block 08-590
Bundle 08-610
lamp 08-620
lED BOT/ EOT Block 08-590
lED BOT /EOT Window 08-590
left Movable Guide and Retractor (NRZI
Feature) 08-220
left Reel Hub and Motor 08-560
logic Panel (3420/3803) 08-630
Pneumatic Supply Flat Belt 08-442
Power Circuit Board (PCB) 08-575
Power Circuit Board (3803 Model 2 only) 08-575
Power Window Glass 08-670
Power Window Safety Bail Cable 08-660
Printed Circuit Board (3803 Model 2 Only) 08-575
Read /Write Head Card 08- 260
Read/Write or Erase Head 08-250
Reel Tachometer 08-550
Right Rear Movable Guide and Retractor 08-210
Right Reel-latch Rear Housing 08-470
Right Reel Motor 08-530
Right Reel Hub 08-480
Right Reel Hub Individual Parts 08-490
Vacuum Column Door Glass 08-690
Replacement
Cartridge Motor 08-535
Pneumatic Supply Flat Belt (Type 4) 08-442
Pneumatic Supply Pulley (All Types of
Pneumatic Supplies) 08-430
Right Reel Hub 08-500
Right Reel Hub Individual Parts 08-490
Right Reel-latch Rear Housing 08-510
Vacuum Column Door 08-680
Request In Interrupt 54-001
Request Track-In-Error Command 40-006
Reserve/Release Operation (TCS Feature) 58-011
Reset/Start or Step Switch (CE panel) 75-001
Resets (TCS Feature) 58-011
Resources PLAN 1
Response Chart 40-008
Rewind (REW)
Command 40-007
Concept 40-001
Operation and Timing Chart 3A-010, 38-010
Problems 3A-ooo, 3B-000
Capstan Won't Rewind to lP After loading Tape
2B-175
No Response or Tape Moves Backward 3A-100,
3B-1oo
Tape Does Not Enter or Stay in Hi Speed
Rewind 3A-170, 38-170
Tape Does Not Stop or Tape Runaway (Forward
s
Safety Section
SAGC (Self-Adjusting Gain Control)
Check 16-220
Theory 5B-120
Scale (CE Tool) 80-000
Schematics
IBG Counter (Model 3, 5, 7) 6A-130
Microprocessor (MP1, MP2) Flow 50-003
Read/Write Flow 50-000, 50-001, 50-002
ROS 1 Trap Conditions 50-010
Scoping Permanent Errors
Offline 00-013
Online 00-014
Select In/Select Out 54-020
Select Out Priority (Table) 90-120
Selection, Tape Control and Tape Unit 54-005
Selection (TCS Feature) 58-011
Selection and Priority 54-010
Selective Reset 50-011
Self-Adjusting Gain Control and Zero Threshold
5B-120
logic 1x8 18-000
Priority Circuits 54-020
Tape Control and Tape Unit Addressing 54-005
Tape Control and Tape Unit Selection 54-005
Tape Unit Selection 54-010
Sense
AnalysiS (MAP) 14-000
Analysis, Error Correction (MAP) 21-000
Bytes 0-23
Bits not Defined in MAPs 00-006
Tables 00-005
Mask for Sense Data After Rewind 15-140
Subsystem Quick Fix Index, Sense Byte
Analysis 00-009
Tape Unit Sense Bytes (Table) 00-005
Sense All Zeros (MAP) 15-0S0
Sense Byte to Bit Conversion (Table) 14-005
Sense Byte 3, 8it 4 17-315
Sense Byte 5, Bit 5 17-410
Sense Command 40-005
Sense Data Equals All Zeros 15-080
Sense Release Command (TCS Feature)
40-006, 58-011
Sense Reserve Command (TCS Feature)
40-005, 58-011
Sensor Adjustment. AMP
(NRZI-Model 3, 5, 7) 08-300
Sensor Adjustment. AMP
(PE Only-Model 3, 5, 7) 08-290
Sequence Chart. Forward Creep During
Rewrite 6B-230
Sequencing, Power On/Off (Concepts) 40-003
Service Controls, Write 53-040
Service In/Service Out 58-005
Service Out Inactive During Reset or
Power-On-Reset (MAP) 13-350
Service Out Tag Active (MAP) 13-280
Service Requirements
6250 Read 50-030
6250 Write 50-020
Set Diagnose Command 40-006
Set ROS Mode/Set CE Compr Switch (CE Panel)
75-002
Seven-Track NRZI Recording (Concepts) 40-002
Shim (CE Tool) SO-ooo
Short Cycle XFR Example (Timing Chart) 16-001
Short Gap (with Tape Damage) 00-012
Signal Dropout 5A-110, 5B-020
510 Trap Failures (MAP) 13-320
Single Tape Unit Problems Chart 00-040
Skew
Buffers 53-075
Detection 53-0S5
Error 17-166
Error Circuit Description 17 -166
Errors, Test Point Chart (Table) 17-162
Error Timing Chart 17 -163
Group Buffer Counter 53-090
Indicator (CE Panel) 75-004
RIC Equals ROC (MAP) 17-160
Test Points, Skew Error~ (Chart) 17-162
Slippage, Tape 58-020
Slow End Readback Check (''.!lAP) 17-150
Solenoid Check, High-Speed Rewind 08-405
Space Block Commands (Description) 40-007
Space File Commands (Description) 40-007
Special Power Requirements-3420 Model 8
(Table) 90-180
Special Register, MP1 (Hardware Errors) 52-060
Special Register, MP2 (TU Bus In) 52-060
Stack Interrupt (TCS Feature) 58-012
Stack/Stack Interrupt (TCS Feature) 58-012
Standard Voltages, Definition of 00-003
Start Capstan Motion 6B-220
Start I/O (510) Routine, Common 55-020
Start Problem Analysis START 1
Start Read Check (MAP) 17-070
Start Times, Forward (Subsystem Characteristics)
40-002
Stat Registers 52-015
Status Byte Chart 00-005
Status Reject, Command or Control 6A-160
Stop Address- FRU list (Table) 16-060
Stop On Control Check Switch (CE Panel) 75-001
Stop On Data Flow Check Switch (CE Panel) 75-001
Stop/Start,Switch (CE Panel) 75-002
Store (AlU Operation) 52-095
INDEX 8
©
"~
",---.y
CoPVnght Internllional Business Machrnes Corporation 1976, 1979, 1983
0
~
,£'""",
/'
C)
(')
'"
/
i'
~
/
C)
!' "-".\
i
\,
r,\
/
./'\
)
'"
()
f~
'",,~
0
0
~
)
.,
/
,
"
'\
"
()
/\,
'" j
o
~l
0
\,
j/
(.
...
(~
c
(
(-
(~
(-
(
(' (
(-"
(~"
(-
(~
(~
('
INDEX (Cont'd)
Subsystem
Address/Feature/Priority Card Plugging 90-110
Cabling 90-060 .
Channel Cable Maximum Length for
6250 BPI (Table) 90-070
Channel Attachment (Table) 90-010
Concepts 40-002
Configuration 90-100
Configuration Worksheet Instructions 90-030
Device Switching 90-050
Error Correcting / Detecting Code 40-002
External Cables (Table) 90-070
Field Tester Conversion 90-170
Installation Checklist (3803-2/3420) 90-020
Installation (Introduction /Instructions) 90-000
Kickplates 90-100
Power Cable 90-060
Power Supply Checks 90-180
Quick Fix Index, 3803-2 00-009
Recording Method 40-002
Unpacking Instructions 90-000
3803/3420 Configurations 40-003
Suppress Out Active (MAP)
13-310
Suppress Out Inactive During Reset or
Power-On-Reset (MAP) 13-340
. Switches
Cartridge Open and Closed 2A-loo, 2B-l00
CE Panel 75-001
Vacuum Column 08-450
Switching Configuration, Device 58-050
Symbols and Legend PLAN 4
Symptoms
Capstan Motion Failure 6B-000
Dropping Ready and Thread and Load Failure
2A-OOO, 2B,ooo
Failure Follows Tape Unit 00-040
Index, 3420/3803 00-010
Unload 4A-000, 4B-000
Tape Motion and Rewind Chart 3A-ooo, 3B-000
3803/3420 Index 00-010
System Diagnostics (Installation) 90-200
System/360/370 Switching 58-005
T
TACH Period Counter (TPC) 6B-205
TACH Start Failure (Sense Byte 10, Bit 5)
(MAP)' 16-170
TACH Velocity Error (MAP) 13-510
Tachometer, Capstan (Model 3, 5, 7) 08-130
Tachometer, Capstan (Model 4, 6, 8) 08-120
Tachometer, Reel 3B-020, 3B-030
Tags In Register, Channel 52-040
Tape Cleaning Kit (CE Tool) 80-000
Tape Cleaner (see Autocleaner)
Tape Control (TCU)
Addressing 40-003
Address Decoders 58-01 0
Address/Feature/Priority Card 90-110
Branch To Read From load Point 55-040
Branch To Write From load Point 55-024
Channel Interface Problems (Table) 18-040
Common Start I/O (SIO) 55-020
Concepts 40-003
Configurations (Concepts) 40-003
Contingent Connection (TCS Feature) 58-012
Control Unit End (TCS Feature) 58-012
Density Feature Configurations 40-004
Device End (TCS Feature) 58-012
Device Switching Feature 54-010
Enable/Disable Switch 40-003
Group Coded Recording (GCR) 55-008
Interface Switch Control 58-011
Logic Panel Card Plugging 19-000
Logic Panel Removal/Replacement 08-630
Loop-Write-To-Read (LWR) 55-005
MAPs (see MAPs)
Metering 40-003
Metering Problems (MAP) 18-060
Online and Offline Status 40-003
Power On / Off Sequencing (Concepts) 40-003
Registers 52-060
Channel Tags and Bus In 52-040
Crossovers 52-025
o 52-060
High and Low-Order ROS 52-035
Local Storage 52-015
MPl and MP2 52-060
MP1/MP2 STAT 52-015
ROS/LSR 52-015
Tape Unit Bus Out 52-045
Resets (TCS Feature 58-011
SOl Logic! (Table) 18-030, 18-032
Selection and Addressing 54-005
Sense Byte Bits Not Defined in MAPs 00-007
Sense Byte Chart 00-005
Sequencing, Power On/Off 40-003
Stack Interrupt (TCS Feature) 58-012
Status Byte Chart 00-005
Tie Breaker Logic 58-010
Timing, Read Cycle' Controls 53-095
Tape Control To/From Device (Chart) 18-005
Tape Crimper Procedure 2A-015, 2B-006
Tape Damage
Analysis of IBG in Developed Tape 00-013
At End of Block (Block Appears Short) 00-012
Consists of Small Spot or Oxide Void (lor
More Tracks) 00-012
Edge Damage· 5B-030
In Beginning Zeros Burst (PE Only) 00-012
In Ending Zeros Burst (PE'Only) 00-012
In Erased Gap Area ·00-012
In Middle of Data 00"'012
Scope.
Offline 00-013
Online . 00-014
Short Gap 00-012
Tape Developing Procedure 00-011
Tape Guide Check (NRZI-Featured Units) 08-230
Tape Slippage 5B-020
Tape Speed (3420 Charlicteristics) 40-002
Tape Subsystem Cabling, Device Switch
Feature 18-011
Tape Transport Cleaner ICE Tool) 80-000
Tape Unit
.
Autocleaner Operation 40-001, 5B-110,
08-360
Bus In Test Points (Table) 17-312
Bus Out Test Points (Table) 17-312
Characteristics Table 40-002
Commands 40-006
(' (~ (' (-- (-
('
(-"
(
C
Commands and Command Status Byte (Table)
16-164
Control Lines Charts 16-213
Double Track Errors 40-002
EC Level 90-210
Erase Head 5B-110
Feature Code 90-210
Full Width Erasure 40-001
General and Daily Cleaning 85-000
Ground Check 08-600
Head-Mirror Stop Adjustment (Model 3, 5, 7)
08-350
IBG Counter (Model 3, 5, 7) 6A-130
Initial Selection 54-000
Initiating Tape Motion 07-010
Interchangeability Problems 40-001
Logic Panel Card Plugging (Models 3, 5, and 7)
19-010
Logic Panel Card Plugging (Models 4, 6, and 8)
19-011
Logic Panel Removal/Replacement 08-630
Loop-Write-To-Read 55-005
Model Number 90-212
Online/Offline Switches (2X8 Switching)
58-080
Power Supplies lA-Ooo, 1B-ooo
Problems, Single Unit 00-040
Selection and Addressing 54-005
Selection Priority 54-010
Sense Byte Chart 00-005
Serial Number 90-210
Single Direct-Drive Capstan 40-001
Single Track Errors 40-002
Speed (Subsystem Characteristics) 40-002
Tape Developing Analysis 00-011
Tape Guide Check (NRZI Feature) 08-230
Track Pointers 40-002
Two-Gap Read/Write Head 40-001
Tape Unit Problems
Bit Packing 5A-115, 5B-025
Capstan Starts Turning When Power is Turned
On (Second Level) 6B-14O
Dropping Ready and Thread and Load Failure
Symptoms 2A-ooo, 2B-000
Capstan Fails to Start a Rewind to Load
Point After Loading Tape into Columns 2B-175
Cartridge Does Not Open 2A-loo, 2B-loo
Intermittent Drop Ready 2A-005, 2B-005
Left or Right Vacuum Column Problems
2A-170, 2B-170
Left Reel Does Not Turn Clockwise at
Threading Speed 2A-l10, 2B -11 0
load Check Prior to BOT Sense 2A-15O,
2B-15O
Ready lamp Does Not Turn On/Window
Does Not Close 2A-210, 2B-210
Right or Left Reel Fails to load Tape
into Columns 2B-180
Right Reel Does Not Turn Clockwise at
Threading Speed 2A-120, 2B,1 20
Tape Does Not Go Backward or Does
Not Stop at BOT 2A-190
Tape Does Not load into Either Column
2A-160, 2B-160
(
C
(
(-.
c
('
(,
C f"
INDEX 9
Tape Goes Forward After loading into
Vacuum Columns 2A-2oo,2B-2JO
Tape Motion Problems (Stubby Column
Loops) SA-Ol0
Tape Moves Backward Off left Reel, ,or Tap~
Unit Performs a Normal Unload ReWind DUring
a Load Operation 2B-190
Tape Starts into Threading Channel and
Stops 2/.1..-140, 2B-14O
Tape 'thn,ads into Right Column 2A-130,
28-130
Forward to Backward Ratio 5A-ll0, 5B-020
Intermittent Drop Ready 07-010
Noise or Bit in IBG 5A-115, 5B-025
Permanent Data Checks (MAP) 5A-105, 5B-002
Sigf1~! Dropo!Jt
5A-110, 58-020
Tape Drt;g Lh~~ck 6A-010, 6B-15O
Tape Edge Damage 5A-110, 58-030
Tape Motion Symptoms 3A-ooo, 3B-000
left or Right Vacuum Column-Tape Pulls Out,
Bobbles, Bottoms 3A-l10, 3B-110
No Response or Tape Moves Backward
3A-loo,3B-l00
Tape Does Not Enter or Stay in High Speed
Rewind or Rewinds to BOT at High Speed
3A-170, 3B-170
Tape Does Not Stop or Tape Runaway (Forward/
Backward) 3A-14O, 3B-14O
Tape Fails to go Backward 3A-130, 3B-13O
Tape Has Wide Excursions in Left Column
During High Speed Rewind 3A-160,3B-160
Tape Pulls Out or Dumps in Left Column
During HS Rew 3A-160,3B-160
Tape Rewinds to Beginning-Of-Tape (BOT) at
High Speed 3A-170,3B-170
Tape Unwinds Off Right Reel 3A-15O,3B-15O
Tape Slipping 5B-020
TapeStretch 5A-115, 5B-020
Tape Unit Check (MAP) 15-090
Tape Unit Loads but Capstan Motion is Faulty
(MAP) 6B-110
Tape Wont Thread, load, and Return to BOT
Properly (MAP) 6B-l00
Unload Failure Symptoms
Cartridge Opener Does Not Close 4A-15O,
4B-150
Pneumatic Motor Does Not Turn Off 4A-160,
4B-160
Power Window Does Not Go Down 4A-14O,
48-140
Ready lamp Does Not Turn On 4A-l00,4B-l00
Tape Does Not Pull Out of Columns Properly
During Unload Rewind 4A-120,4B-12O
Tape Does Not Wind Completely Onto Right
Reel or Reels Do Not Stop 4A-13O,4B-130
Unload Rewind Pushbutton (No Response)
4A-110,4B-110
TB-l, TB2, and TB3 Diagram lA-002
TCS (see Two Channel Switch)
TCU (see Tape Control)
Technique, Card Isolation PLAN 1
Tee and Hose Assembly (CE Tool) 80-000
Terminator and Cable Plugging 90-060
Terminology Notes PLAN 1
3803-2/3420
INDEX 9
Cl Copyright Intemationel BUlin••• Mechin•• Corporllion 1983
INDEX (Cont'd)
INDEX 10
Test I/O Instruction 40-009
Test Points, Channel Buffer/Write Bus (Table) 17-021
Test Points (Read Card) 5B-004
Tester, CE (see Field Tester)
Theory (see Tape Unit or Tape Control Unit)
Theory (TCS Feature) 5S-01O
Theory of Operation
Additional Stopping Distances After Go
Extend 6A-140
Air Bearings 4A-160, 4B-160
Airflow and Voltage Monitoring System
1A-OOO, 1B-ooO
Backspace 6B-230
Capstan Control Circuits 6A-120, 6B-020
Capstan Drive System 6A-120,6B-200
Capstan Motion Checks 6A-OOO, 6B-000
Capstan Motor and Controls 6A-120,6B-020
Capstan Pulse Generation 6A-120, 6B-2oo
Cartridge Opener Does Not Close 4A-150, 4B-150
Data Exchange on DEVI During Write
Operation 5A-130, 5B-130
Erase Head (Schematic) 58-110
Extended Go 6B-205
Go Extend 18G Counts 6A-14O
Go Extensions in Quarter TACH Pulses 68-205
IBG Counter Circuits 6A-130, 68-205
IBG Generation SA-150,6B-210
Left or Right Vacuum Column Problems 3A-ll0,
3B-l10
Left Reel Does Not Turn Clockwise at Threading
Speed 2A-l10, 2B-ll0
Load Check Prior to BOT Sense 2S-150
Major Elements of Capstan Control Logic SB-205
Plugging (Model 7 Only) 6A-l40
Pneumatic System (flow diagram) 4A-160
Pneumatic Switches 4A-160, 48-160
Polarity Hold Drive (PHD) Register 68-205
Power Check 1A-OOO, 18-000
Power Supplies lA-OOO, 18-000
Proportional Drive Counter (PDC) 6B-205
Read 8ackward Operation 5A- 140, 58 - 140
Read Card and Read Card Circuits 5B- 120
Read Card Reference Generator 5B-120
Read Forward Operation 5A-l40, 5B-140
Read Only Storage (ROS) 6B-205
Reel and Capstan Operations During Rewind
3A-030, 38-030
Reel Drive System Schematic 3A-020, 3B-020
Reel Motors and Drivers 3A-020, 38-020
Reel Stabilization 3A-020, 3B-020
Reel Tachometers 38-020, 38-030
Reel Tachometers, During Rewind 3A-030, 38-030
Reset/Start or Stop Switch 75-001
Rewind Operation 3A-Ol0, 38-01 0
Self Adjusting Gain Control (SAGC) 58- 120
TACH Period Counter (TPC) 6B-205
Three-Way Valve 4A-1S0,4B-160
Transfer Valve 4A- 160, 4B-160
Unload Operation with Cartridge 4A-000,
48-000
Unload Operation without Cartridge 4A-000,
48-000
Write Head, Erase head, and Write Card
(Schematic) 5B-l10
Zero Threshold 58-120
S MHz Oscillator and GCC 68-205
3420 Power Supplies 1A-OOO
Thread and load Operations 2A-Ol0, 2B-020
Thread, load
.
Check Points 2A-020, 2B-030
Checking with Cartridge (Timing
Chart) 2A-Ol0, 28-020
Checking without Cartridge (Differences)
2A-020, 2B-030
Failure Symptoms 2A-OOO, 28-000
left Reel Turns Too Fast 2A-ll0, 28-110
Operations
Cartridge Does Nqt Not Open 2A-l00, 2B-l00
left or Right Vacuum Column Problems 2A-170,
2B-170, 3A-ll0, 3B-l10
left Reel Does Not Turn Clockwise at
Threading Speed 2A-l10, 2B-ll0
Load Check Prior to BOT Sense 2A-150,
2B-150
Motor Not Running or Transfer Valve Not Pic/
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.6
Linearized : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Create Date : 2018:10:06 18:47:57-08:00
Modify Date : 2018:10:06 19:21:23-07:00
Metadata Date : 2018:10:06 19:21:23-07:00
Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format : application/pdf
Document ID : uuid:2c445da0-e376-f74b-9444-0f677761814e
Instance ID : uuid:35bba479-4d97-0e4c-ad93-4581a7de7528
Page Layout : SinglePage
Page Mode : UseNone
Page Count : 162
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools